JP2023054096A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can improve the interest for a game.

SOLUTION: In a winning of a special combination, when stop switches 42-44 are operated in a first operation mode, a thirty-third small combination is formed and processing more likely to win a transition lottery to an AT mode is executed, whilst when the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a second operation mode, a first small combination to a sixth small combination are formed and processing more unlikely to win the transition lottery to the AT mode is executed. An operation order by which the first small combination to the sixth small combination winning are formed in a push order bell winning is included in the second operation mode. When the special combination is won in the AT mode, a notification of the operation order by which the first small combination to the sixth small combination winning are formed is given.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
a stop operation means for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. drive control means for executing
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
a granting means capable of granting a number of game values corresponding to the lottery results of the lottery means;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at a predetermined position that can be visually recognized through the display unit, and the first number of games is played by the giving means. While value is assigned,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination is placed at a predetermined position visible through the display unit. can be stopped, and a specific result is set in which a second number of game values, which is larger than the first number, is awarded by the granting means,
Mode notification means capable of executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means;
a specific processing means capable of executing a specific process related to the mode notification function of the mode notification means;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation mode when winning a special combination; 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows a continuation determination process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; (a) is a flowchart showing a lottery result command setting process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between a lottery result command and a pressing order notification command. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. It is a flow chart which shows the process for AT lottery at the time of a stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a ceiling subtraction value table and a stop transition lottery table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timing of AT winning and CZ winning; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for the number of precursor games; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a selection rate of AT mode continuation rate; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for the number of CZ games; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT game number processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a start time CZ effect setting process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing stop time CZ effect setting processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of the presentation of each game during the CZ mode; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the execution timing of the stop time CZ effect setting process and the occurrence rate of the explosive effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a portent game number table; It is a flow chart which shows a sign effect setting process at the time of start. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an indication effect setting process at the time of stop; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the difference between the displayed number of games and the actual ceiling reaching game; 13 is a flowchart showing a first stop ON effect setting process in Modification 1; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a start AT lottery process in Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode that AT winning information is performed in a special role winning game. In Modified Example 3, (a) is a flowchart showing a first stop ON effect setting process, and (b) and (c) are diagrams for explaining how the fixed effect is performed. 16 is a flowchart showing a part of AT lottery processing at the time of start in modification 4. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a prior determination process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a start time CZ effect setting process; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing navigation mode processing in Modified Example 5. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for specific alerting|reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of specific information production|presentation. In Modified Example 6, (a) is a flowchart showing part of the AT game number processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop AT addition processing. It is a figure which shows an example of each addition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a part of process for lottery for addition AT at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows an addition preliminary determination process. (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the effect setting process at the time of start, and (b) and (c) are diagrams for explaining an outline of a specific notification effect during AT. In the modification 7, (a) is a flowchart showing part of the lottery result handling process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification minor combination lottery table. In Modified Example 8, (a) is a flowchart showing an advantageous zone transition lottery, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification minor combination lottery table. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a notification minor combination lottery in Modification 9. FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing second section display processing in Modification 10. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the operation mode and the advantage when winning a special role in the normal section. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each special role in modification 11; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the pressing order notification effect when the pressing order bell is won and the pressing order notification effect when the special role is won. It is a flow chart which shows a part of lottery result correspondence processing. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining processing relating to the instruction function of each special role in modification 12; It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table.

<First embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, 1st on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 14th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Ark shell" symbol (for example, 4th on the left reel 32L), "White shell" symbol (eg, left reel 32L) 19th reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by betting medals and a line that is not activated are set. As winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is awarded, or a privilege of shifting the game state is awarded. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an active line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, the game may be started with three medals betted or the game may be started with two medals betted. When medals are bet and the game is started, only the bend line L6 is set as the valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as the valid lines. In the following description, the bend line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In the following description, a 3-bet game is a game that starts with 3 medals bet, a 2-bet game is a game that starts with 2 medals bet, and a 2-bet game starts with 1 medal. The game is also called a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first minor winning combination is won. When the first minor win is established, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second minor win is won. When the second minor win is established, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and a small winning combination different from the first small winning combination described above can be achieved due to the difference in the lines on which the "bell" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Red Shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the third small Awarded for the role. When the third minor win is established, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination can be easily understood from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the fourth minor winning combination is won. When the fourth minor win is established, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the fourth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the upward right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first to third small winning combinations can be easily understood from the difference in the line on which the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth minor win is won. When the fifth minor win is established, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to the 4th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the sixth minor winning combination is won. When the sixth minor win is established, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbols corresponding to the 6th minor winning combination are stopped on the activated line ML, the "Bell" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the lower stage of the right reel 32R. stops (stops in an Oyama type). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol makes it possible for the player to recognize the first to fifth small winning combinations. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

"Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "White 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Ark shell" symbol or "Seinen" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "White 7" symbol and "White shellfish" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML, the seventh minor winning combination is won. When the seventh minor win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth minor win is won. When the eighth minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination different from the 7th small winning combination described above can be realized due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" pattern is aligned. It is also understandable that

The 9th to 32nd small wins are so-called lost wins in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small wins are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small wins are the left reel 32L “Replay” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Ark shell” symbol, “White shell” symbol, “Senior” symbol or “Bell” symbol. Designs, middle reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red clam" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " Bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol, right reel 32R's "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "BAR" " symbol or "replay" symbol and the corresponding combination stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 9th minor winning prize to the 32nd minor winning prize should all stop with the “Bell” symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no bell, and it is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

When the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the 33rd minor winning combination is won. When the 33rd minor win is established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(f), when the symbols corresponding to the 33rd minor winning combination are stopped on the activated line ML, the middle line L2 may be stopped together with the "BAR" symbols. .

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the first to 33rd minor wins won, the paid out minor wins are a kind of privilege (game value) given according to the result of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as the paid out medal rate. Sometimes.

Winnings that give a replay benefit (game value) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals include first to twelfth replay winnings. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to twelfth replays.

The first replay consists of a "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "white shell" symbol or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols are stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. To establish. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 13(e), the "white 7" symbols are stopped together on the medium line L2.

In the third replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. To establish. When the symbol corresponding to the third replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 13(f), the "WHITE 7" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel. The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle row of 32R.

The fourth and fifth re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

The sixth replay consists of a “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “red 7” symbol, a “white 7” symbol, a “BAR” symbol, and a “cherry” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right reel symbol stops. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol appears on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

In the seventh replay, the left reel 32L has a “bell” symbol, the middle reel 32M has a “white 7” symbol, a “cherry” symbol, a “red clam” symbol or a “youth” symbol, and a right reel 32R has a “watermelon” symbol. Or, when the "red clam" symbol stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), so that the so-called "watermelon tenpai" is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The eighth replay consists of the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “replay” symbol on the right reel 32R. and stop on the activated line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the eighth replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped on the middle line L2.

In the ninth replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML. Winning will be established. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the ninth replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), so that the so-called middle stage replay tenpai stop mode is achieved.

The tenth replay consists of the ``BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' symbol, the ``BAR'' symbol, the ``cherry'' symbol, the ``red clam'' symbol or the ``young man'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. 'Red 7' pattern, 'White 7' pattern, 'BAR' pattern, 'Cherry' pattern, 'white shell' pattern or 'young man' pattern stops on the active line ML, winning is established. Also, in the twelfth replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. Winning is established when the ball stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13(c) and 13(d), when the symbols corresponding to the 10th re-game win or 12th re-game win stop on the activated line ML, a "Cherry" symbol appears on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. When the 10th re-game or 12th re-game is won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper stage in the case of winning the 10th re-game. However, in the case of the 12th re-game winning, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning. In the 11th re-game, winning is established when the 10th re-game and the 12th re-game cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB wins. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. When the symbols corresponding to the 1st BB win are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the symbols "BAR" are aligned and stopped on the upward right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 14(b). , "Red 7" symbols, "Red 7" symbols, and "BAR" symbols stop in order from the left on the upward right line L5.

When the "red clam" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second BB wins. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. When the symbols corresponding to the 2nd BB winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(c), the symbols "WHITE 7" are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3, or as shown in FIG. 14(d). , ``white 7'' symbols, ``white 7'' symbols, and ``red 7'' symbols stop in order from the left on the lower line L3.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

Stop lamps 42b to 44b are built in the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively. The light from the stop lamps 42b-44b is partially transmitted through the operating surfaces of the stop switches 42-44, and the light from the stop lamps 42b-44b becomes visible through the stop switches 42-44. When the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is enabled, the stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled to turn on, and when the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disabled, the corresponding stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled. are controlled to turn off.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual tokens as game media at once out of the prescribed number of games. is provided. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to three and the specific number is set to three, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, three virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. is inserted, and if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number is set as two and the specific number is set as two, two credits are inserted on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when virtual medals are inserted and the prescribed number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, When three virtual medals are inserted under the condition that there are credits, the specified number is set to three or two, and the specific number is set to two, the first When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for the player to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. better than Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. A direction monitor 68 is provided which has an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. there is The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, operation buttons for effects may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. , a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the set value, the set value information storage area 106c for storing the set value, and the like.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed by power failure processing (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display are connected to the output side. 65 is connected. Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Further, all or part of the components 42b to 44b and 63 to 65 connected to the display control device 81 are configured to be directly connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 controls these components 42b to 44b. , 63 to 65 may be directly controlled.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether or not the read result is normal. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, a timer update process for subtracting/adding the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay wins have been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process (step S107) of the timer interrupt process. When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the end of the start waiting process, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted or if the number of bets is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step S206. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. and the auxiliary display section 65 are controlled.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211, and the medal payout process of step S212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the game state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags are set, the current game state is determined to be the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is selected. . When the current game is a 3-bet game, the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 21). In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing of the RAM 106 . In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step S306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, in step S306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and a combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=11, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value Regardless, it is about 1/18.4 respectively, and the probability of winning the pushing order bell is about 1/1.56. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/6.22 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays and small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0).

In addition, when playing a 3-bet game in the normal game state, a special combination (IV=27) is set that allows any one of the 1st to 6th small combinations and the 33rd small combination to be won. there is The probability of winning the special role (probability of winning when IV=27) is about 1/20 regardless of the set value. The special role will be explained in detail later.

In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/6.22 (1st BB) regardless of the set value.

On the other hand, if the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. In the 2-bet game as well, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is zero. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command setting process for setting a lottery result command is executed in step S311. Details of the lottery result command setting process will be described later, but the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the player to grasp the result of the win/loss determination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the win flag set in step S306. For example, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag, and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, if the watermelon is won (winning at IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination winning flag are set. Stop symbol information is set so that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Furthermore, in the stop information setting process, when a special winning combination is won (winning when IV=27) and the 1st minor winning combination winning flag to the 6th minor winning combination winning flag and the 33rd minor winning combination winning flag are set, the 3rd small winning combination winning flag is set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st to 6th minor winning combinations and the 33rd minor winning combination can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1BB win flag is set, if the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 1BB win is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even when the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started in the 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, setting of the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning will be performed. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step S313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1BB prize, the 7th minor role prize, and the When the stop pattern information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established prior to the 1st BB winning. . In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply A is won, the 2nd BB prize is won, and the first replay is performed. , 2nd re-game, 3rd re-game and 4th re-game winning are set so that each re-game winning has priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

Furthermore, in the priority setting process of step S313, if a special winning combination is won and stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination and the 33rd minor winning combination is set, When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor winning prize is preferentially established, and when operated in the second operating mode, the first to sixth minor winning prizes are established. The order of priority is set so that the winning of a small winning combination is preferentially established.

After executing the process of step S313, after executing the section display first process in step S314, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation production process is for performing production using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309, the result of the lottery result correspondence process performed in step S310, etc. processing. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 outputs a progress (command) to that effect to the display control device 81, and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side causes each stop switch 42 . . . 44 are illuminated to notify the player or the like that the stop command can be generated.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel. The display control device 81 that has received the stop command command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect of stopping the corresponding reel, and also corresponds to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time. Control is performed so that the stop lamps 42b to 44b are extinguished.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won at the push order bell (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when operated in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established when the player wins. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, when the winning symbol becomes a winning symbol regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the winning symbol is selected. can be stopped on the effective line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, as described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor combination winning can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it cannot be stopped at the upper stage, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle-order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red clam" symbol stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. 2 minor winning prize, 3rd minor winning prize, 4th minor winning winning prize, 5th minor winning winning prize, or 6th minor winning winning prize are established, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, other minor wins will be established, or none of the minor wins will be established and will be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor winning combination is established.

Next, a case where a special combination is won and the left stop switch 42 among the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated first will be described as an example. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 24, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination, the second minor winning combination or the 33rd minor winning combination.

The first minor winning symbol and the second minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L are "replay" symbols. Also, the 33rd minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "BAR" symbol. In this case, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol to the 9th "BAR" symbol reach the middle row, the first minor winning symbol or the second minor winning symbol is selected. Drive control is performed so as to stop the "BAR" symbol, which is the 33rd minor combination symbol, instead of the "Replay" symbol, in the middle stage. The 33rd minor winning symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "bell" symbol, which is the 33rd minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R, stop at the position of the effective line ML regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43 and 44, and 33 minor wins are established.

On the other hand, even if the special role is won and the left stop switch 42 among the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated first, the 0th "replay" symbol to the 4th "red clam" symbol. Or, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 10th "replay" symbol to the 19th "white shell" symbol reach the middle row, the first minor symbol or the second minor symbol. Driving control is performed so that the "replay" pattern is stopped in the middle stage. Then, the "replay" symbol, which is the first minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M and the first minor winning symbol of the right reel 32R, stops at the position of the effective line ML regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43 and 44, and The second minor winning symbol on the reel 32M and the "bell" symbol, which is the second minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R, stop at the position of the effective line ML regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43-44. Winning a winning combination or winning a second minor winning combination is established.

In addition, when a special role is won and any of the stop switches 42 to 44 other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the 3rd minor role to the 6th Winning a small role is established.

That is, when winning the special combination, the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol to the 9th "BAR" symbol of the left reel 32L reach the middle stage as the first operation mode. In this case, the 33rd minor winning combination is established and one medal is paid out. 8 medals will be paid out after the minor win to the 6th minor win.

As described above, the 1st through 6th small wins can be won even if any of the bells in the pressing order is won and the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is the corresponding operation order. To establish. Then, when a special role is won, by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode, it is possible to clearly grasp that the special role was won in the game. , When the special role is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode, whether the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning has been established with the special role as a trigger, or The player cannot judge from the stop result or the number of payouts whether the prize is established because the operation order at the time of winning the pressing order bell corresponds to the 1st to 6th minor wins.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step S414. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state process, a winning result handling process is executed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , the medal payout process is terminated. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step S414 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to a MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games. Playing 2-bet games is allowed. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step S505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step S506, a process of inputting "15" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out by inputting "15" to the BB counter in step S506. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step S501. In subsequent step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for allowing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to . Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of coins of the above game. That is, by shifting to the 1BB state, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3, and the 1BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

Note that the default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is activated.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the first BB winning has not been established means that the second BB winning has been established. In this case, the process advances to step S511 to execute the process of inputting "15" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, a process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, a process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the second BB state is started. The display control device 81 that has received the second BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed. It should be noted that the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different in appearance and content to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. In other words, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed as a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step S515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate 1-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.31. Also, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase plus or minus about 0.00), and the number of medals does not increase or decrease in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, in the first BB state and the second BB state, although an increase in medals cannot be expected, it is possible to proceed with the game without reducing the number of medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and in the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st to 6th minor wins in which 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.36. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and even in the 2-bet game, winning is more likely to occur in the 2 BB state than in the normal game state. is set.

However, as described above, even if the first BB state and the second BB state are eliminated, the number of medals held cannot be expected to increase.

In the bonus state process, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any minor combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process by the lottery table for the BB state and each reel control. When winning is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, in step S516, a process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step S516. For example, if a common bell is won and the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are established, 13 coins will be paid out, so in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step S517 that it is not equal to or less than 0, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed in step S518. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step S519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

After that, in step S521, after setting the prescribed bet numbers to 2 and 3, the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is performed. The game will be played at In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to facilitate the 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are finished, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 cards by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57. Three medals must be inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 in order to play the betting game.

Here, in the present slot machine 10, game characteristics using a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The normal game state in which neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set and neither BB is won is a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a two bet game.

In the non-internal state, a 3-bet game can win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and a 2-bet game can win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, the winning of the second BB can basically occur in the 2-bet game.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is carried over is entered. Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. The first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. In addition, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another combination when the combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for increasing medals. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the pushing order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins will be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the winning small combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, compared to the 1BB state and the 2BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have a greater fluctuation range of medal increase and decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won by pushing order. is big. Then, for example, AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation sequence (Fig. 23) of winning the 1st minor winning combination to winning the 6th minor winning combination when the winning order of the bell is won. By switching between non-AT mode (non-navi mode) and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game for operating the first credit input switch 56, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds while the above-mentioned 2nd BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB is won. will be continued.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the 2nd BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) is a game that uses notification (push order notification) when the push order bell is won. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process of ascertaining the number of bets for the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S602. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S603. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, or in the internal state after winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, 2 and 3 are set as the prescribed bet numbers. In the state, 3 is set as the prescribed number of bets. The processing of steps S602 and S603 is processing for determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific prescribed number (specific set number) prescribed (set) in association with the gaming state. , and if there is no specific specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (the instruction function process) from step S604 onward.

That is, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, while the process for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. In the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the specified bet number, the two-bet game is not executed, and the display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, the internal state can be played in the 3-bet game, and the normal game in which the second BB is carried over can be facilitated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section shift lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 30, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 30, as a trigger for the lottery to move to the advantageous section, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, pressing order bell, watermelon, and special role are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S704, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger role. In this case, if it is determined that the game result grasped in step S701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transfer lottery has been won, in step S706, a process of setting an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous zone shift lottery process ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in the AT mode, and is set when it is possible to shift to the AT mode. The AT mode win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode shift lottery has been won, the shift to the AT mode has been confirmed, and the state has not yet shifted to the AT mode. is. If none of the flags is set in step S606, the start AT lottery process is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S606, continuation determination processing is executed in step S608, and AT addition processing is executed in step S609.

<Start AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery process at the start of step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter provided in the various counter area 106e is zero. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing the transition to the AT mode regardless of the suitability of the AT mode transition lottery (without winning) when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches the ceiling game number. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games. The number of ceiling games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. By the way, subtraction of the ceiling counter is executed at the end of the game. In other words, when it is determined in step S801 that the ceiling counter is 0, this means that the number of ceiling games has reached 0 in the previous game.

If the ceiling counter is not 0, AT mode transition lottery processing is executed in steps S802 to S807.

That is, in step S802, a process of acquiring a random number for AT mode transition lottery is executed. Dedicated counters in various counter areas 106e are used as random numbers for the lottery for AT mode transition, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals, and the latest updated value of the counters is acquired in step S802. In the subsequent step S803, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which the AT mode transition lottery is easier to win than the normal mode are set as display modes with different winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery, and the CZ mode flag is set to the CZ mode. This is a flag for the CPU to recognize that it is.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S804, then in step S805, a process of acquiring a start normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag is set in step S804, then in step S806, a process of acquiring an AT mode transition lottery table for starting CZ is executed.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the normal AT mode transition lottery table at the start and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at the start, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is set according to the lottery result of the game. For example, if it is an AT mode transition lottery triggered by chance A, the AT mode transition will be won with a probability of 1% for normal use, and the AT mode transition will be won with a probability of 3% for CZ. Thus, the AT mode transition lottery table for start CZ is set to make it easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the normal AT mode transition lottery table at start. Further, the normal reply A, normal reply B and normal reply C are set so that the normal reply does not win the AT mode transition, while the CZ reply may win the AT mode transition.

By the way, in the normal AT mode transition lottery table at the start and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at the start used in the AT lottery process at the start, if the lottery result of the game is a special role, it is considered that the AT mode transition is won. It is set so that it will not In addition, in the start AT lottery process, the AT mode shift lottery may not be performed with the special role as a trigger.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is obtained in step S805 or step S806, the obtained transition lottery table, the game lottery result grasped in step S803, and the AT lottery random number obtained in step S802 are combined. , AT mode shift lottery processing is executed in step S807. Specifically, whether or not the AT lottery random number acquired in step S802 is within the winning numerical range set according to the lottery result of each game in the table acquired in step S805 or step S806 If the random number for the AT lottery is within the numerical range for winning, it is determined that the AT mode transition is won, and if the random number for the AT lottery is outside the numerical range for winning, the AT mode transition is made. Determined as non-election. Then, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition win has been made.

If it is determined at step S808 that the AT mode transition is won, and if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0 at step S802, the processing for AT mode winning at steps S809 to S812 is executed. If it is determined in step S808 that the AT mode transition win has not been made, the AT mode non-win process is executed in steps S813 to S816.

In the processing for winning the AT mode, in step S809, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the AT mode transition in the CZ mode has been won. In the case of winning during the CZ mode, processing for terminating the CZ mode is performed in steps S810 and S811. That is, in step S810, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed. Then, in step S811, a process of clearing the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e to 0 is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the CZ mode. It is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time a is consumed.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S809, or after the process of step S811 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in the flag storage area 106d is executed in step S812. Through such processing, the determination in step S606 is affirmative from the next game.

In the AT mode non-winning process, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step S814, a CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and whether or not to shift to the CZ mode is determined by lottery using the lottery result of the game ascertained in step S803. . As shown in FIG. 30, the CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery differs according to the lottery result of the game. It is set so that the easier the game lottery result is, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. In other words, if the lottery results for a game in which the AT mode transition lottery is likely to be won, but the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the game is set to easily shift to the CZ mode.

After the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed in step S814, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery was won, and if not, the AT lottery process is ended as it is. In the case of CZ mode transition winning, in step S816, a process of setting a CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed.

After one of the winning flags is set in step S812 or step S816, the precursor mode setting process is performed in steps S817 to S820. The portent mode is a mode in which a portent effect is performed to indicate that the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. After passing through the omen mode, the notification of the transition lottery that has been won is performed.

In step S817, a lottery process for the precursor game is executed. In the lottery process for the number of precursory games, the number of precursory games is drawn by lottery according to the type of transition lottery that has been won, the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning, and the like. For example, if you win the AT mode transition lottery, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number than if you win the CZ mode transition lottery, or if you win the transition lottery with Cherry A. In this case, a longer predictive game number is more likely to be selected than in the case of winning the transfer lottery in Cherry C.

In this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 in step S817. As described above, if you win the AT mode transition lottery during CZ mode, the CZ mode will end regardless of the number of remaining games in CZ mode. can be comprehended by the player. Therefore, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the sign mode is set to 0 games, so that the AT mode transition lottery is won even though the player knows that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. It is possible to reduce discomfort due to the suggestive notification of what has been done in the precursor mode.

In subsequent step S818, a process of inputting the lottery result of step S817 to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The portent counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining portent games, and is decremented by one each time a game is completed during the portent mode.

Then, in step S819, a process of setting an omen flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step S820, a process of setting an omen command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the main AT lottery is performed. end the processing. The omen flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the omen mode is on, and the omen command indicates that the omen mode has been set, the number of games in the omen mode, and which transition lottery has been won. This is a command for making the control device 81 grasp. The display control device 81, which has received the portent command, grasps the number of games in the portent mode and the type of transition lottery that has been won, and performs processing for executing an effect during the portent mode on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. conduct.

<Continuation determination process>
Next, the continuation determination process executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the continuation determination process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set.

Here, in the AT mode of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 18) of games are set as one set (number of unit continuations, unit state), and for example, when updating one set of AT mode (set is When starting or ending a set), a continuation lottery for the next set will be held, and if you win the continuation lottery, after the end of the set, you will move to the next set and will not win the continuation lottery. , the AT mode ends without moving to the next set. Then, the continuation determination process in step S608 is a process for performing the continuation lottery when updating the set.

In step S901, it is determined whether the AT game counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 18 or not. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in one set, and is a counter to which 18 is input when updating the set. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is one set of AT mode start games. If the current game is not the start game, the continuation determination process is terminated. If it is the starting game, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the AT set counter provided in the various counter area 106e is zero. The AT set counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of sets that can be continued to the next set without performing the continuation lottery even if the continuation lottery is not won, and the continuation condition is This is a counter which is incremented by 1 when the player wins an additional lottery in the established situation and is subtracted by 1 when the continuation lottery is not won or the next set is continued without performing the continuation lottery. If the AT set counter is 0, in step S903, the winning probability of the continuation lottery selected in the current AT mode is grasped.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of continuation rates are set as the probability of winning the continuation lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "continuation rate"). Specifically, as shown in FIG. A high rate of 90% and lower continuation rates of 60% and 10% are set. The continuation rate is set when shifting to the AT mode (continuation rate setting processing in step S1211 described later). In step S903, the information set in the continuation rate setting process is read to grasp the current continuation rate of the AT mode.

After grasping the continuation rate in step S903, a continuation lottery process is executed in step S904. That is, if a continuation rate of 90% is selected, the winning will continue with a probability of 90% in the process of step S904, and if a continuation rate of 10% is selected, 10% will be won in the process of step S904. Percentage chance of winning continuously.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the result of the process in step S904 is continuous winning.If continuous winning is determined, in step S906, a process of setting a continuous flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The continuation flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the continuation condition of the current set (condition for shifting to the next set) is satisfied. Then, in step S907, after executing the process of setting the continuation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the continuation determination process ends.

If it is determined in step S902 that the AT set counter is not 0, then in step S908 the AT set counter is decremented by one. After setting, the continuation determination process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT set counter is not 0, the continuation condition of the set is satisfied without passing through the continuation lottery. It should be noted that the continuation lottery may be executed regardless of the value of the AT set counter, and the continuation condition may be met if the AT set counter is 1 or more in the case of continuation non-winning.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of one set in the AT mode (when the start lever 41 is operated), whether or not the continuation condition for whether the AT mode continues to the next set of the set to be started this time is satisfied or not. A determination is made, and when it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied, a continuation flag is set, and the information is output to the display control device 81 . In this case, the display control device 81 performs a process for performing an effect assuming that the continuation condition is satisfied as the effect of the current set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S905 that it is not the continuation winning, the continuation determination processing is terminated as it is. In this case, the continuation condition is not satisfied at the start of one set in the AT mode, and no continuation command is output at the start of the set. The display control device 81 grasps that the continuation condition is not established by not receiving the continuation command at the start of the set, and performs the production on the premise that the continuation condition is not established as the production of the current set. Take action to ensure that

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S609 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the AT add-on process, separate from the above continuation lottery, an add-on lottery to add the number of sets in AT mode is performed, and if you win in the add-on lottery, regardless of the result of the continuation lottery for the next set Try to continue until the next set.

First, in step S1001, a process of acquiring a random number for an additional lottery is executed. Dedicated counters in various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the additional lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals, and the latest updated value of the counters is obtained in step S1001. In the subsequent step S1002, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S1003, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed.

As shown in FIG. 30, the additional lottery table has an additional winning rate set according to the lottery result of the game. While normal roles such as bells do not win additional prizes, specific roles such as Chance A to Chance C, Cherry A to Cherry C, Common Bell, and Watermelon, which are difficult to win in the lottery process of each game, are set to allow additional wins. It is In the lottery process of each game, among the specific roles, for example, chance C is more likely to be won than chance A, and cherry C is more likely to be won than cherry A. It is set such that the harder the lottery results are, the easier it is to win the additional lottery. It should be noted that, if the lottery result of each game is a normal combination, the additional lottery may not be won, and if the lottery result of each game is a normal combination, the additional lottery may not be performed. In addition, it is possible to have a configuration in which an additional win can be won even when the lottery result of each game is a normal role, and the probability of the extra win in the normal role is lower than the probability of the extra win in the case of a specific role. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the game is a special role, as described above, in the AT lottery process at the start, it is set so as not to win the AT mode transition, but the additional lottery in this AT addition process In , it is set so that even if it is a special role, it can be added and won.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step S1003, an additional lottery is executed in step S1004. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the random number for the additional lottery obtained in step S1001 is within the numerical range for winning set according to the lottery result of each game in the table obtained in step S1003. When the random number for the addition lottery is within the numerical range for winning, it is determined that the lottery is won, and when the random number for the addition lottery is out of the numerical range for winning, it is determined that the lottery is not won. After performing the additional lottery in step S1004, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won in step S1005. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the additional lottery is won, it is determined in step S1006 whether or not the continuation flag is set.

If the continuation flag is not set in step S1006, processing for setting the continuation flag is executed in step S1007. Then, in step S1008, after executing the process of setting the continuation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT addition process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the continuation command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

On the other hand, if the continuation flag is set in step S1006, a process of adding 1 to the AT set counter is executed in step S1009. By adding 1 to the AT set counter in step S1009, it is determined that the AT mode will continue at least until the set following the current set. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that 1 is uniformly added to the AT set counter when winning the additional lottery, but it may be configured to add a number of 2 or more. The number to be added to the AT set counter may be determined by lottery according to the lottery result of the game in which the number is 0.

In the following step S1010, the processing for setting the set addition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this processing for addition is ended. The set add-on command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp the fact that the add-on lottery has been won and the value of the AT set counter. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of sets may be added for one additional win, it is preferable to set information on the number of sets to be added to the set addition command. The display control device 81 that has received the set addition command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the addition of the set by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

In the lottery result handling process (FIG. 28), after the process of step S607 or step S609 is executed, the process of notifying the pressing order of the stop switches 42-44 is executed in steps S610-S619.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the pressing order notification processing executed in steps S610 to S619, an outline of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. will be explained. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 34(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the digits "0" to "6" and "9" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can display at least '0' to '6' and '9', '0.' to '6.' and '9.', and '.'.

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are pressed in which the winning results differ depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, among the operation mode combinations in which the winning results differ depending on the operation modes of the stop switches 42 to 44. This display segment is used when notifying the operation order of the winning hand and when notifying the type of the operation mode hand.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 34(b), the display of "1" to "6" corresponds to the notification of the operation order of the pushing order. When a winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "left" → "middle" → "right", the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed to indicate "1". ” is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 34(c), "0" and "9" correspond to the notification of the type of the operation mode combination. , the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2 and the fourth display segment N4 to the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed as "0". In this case, although the player can understand from the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 that the winning order bell is won, even if the bell is selected as the order bell, as in FIG. Since the advantageous operation mode is not clearly indicated, the advantageous operation mode cannot be grasped from the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 .

Further, in the case of a special combination in the operation mode combination, the first display segment N1 to third display segment N3 and the fifth display segment N5 to seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "9" is displayed. Is displayed. As already explained, in the case of a special role, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor role winning is established, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode. , the first to sixth minor winning prizes are established, and these first and second operating modes are predetermined operating modes. In other words, when the command monitor 68 notifies that a special combination is being played as described above, the user can operate in the second operation mode to win the 1st minor combination to the 6th minor combination with a large number of payouts. It is possible to establish a winning role.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is established when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition in which the transition to the advantageous section can occur and the pushing order informing is possible is established. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which it is easy for the player to win a prize in an advantageous manner by making it easier to notify the operation order of the push order bell, etc., and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefit of the pushing order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

The processing for notifying the order of pressing in steps S610 to S619 will be described.

That is, in step S610, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current game is the winning of the bell in order of pressing. If the bell is won in the pressing order, it is determined in step S611 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set, in step S612, the instruction monitor 68 is turned on so that the pressing order notification corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes will be carried out according to the type of the pressing order bell this time. Control. Then, in step S613, the push order notification commands each set to include information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are set as output targets to the display control device 81. After executing the processing, the processing for notifying the pressing order is terminated. That is, in step S613, a process of setting any one of the pressing order notification command for the first minor combination to the pressing order notification command for the sixth minor combination is executed. The display control device 81 that has received these pressing order notification commands controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed.

If the AT mode flag is not set in step S611, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled in step S614 so that group notification of the pressing order bell (FIG. 34(c)) is performed. That is, in step S614, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to notify that it is the push order bell among the operation mode combinations. After that, the lottery result handling process is ended.

If it is determined in step S610 that the bell has not been won in the pressing order, it is determined in step S615 whether or not the special role has been won. In the case of not winning the special combination, the lottery result corresponding processing is terminated as it is. If the special combination is won, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set in step S616.

If the AT mode flag is not set in step S616, then in step S617 the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the special combination notification (FIG. 34(c)) is performed. That is, in step S617, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to notify that it is a special combination among the operation mode combinations. After that, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

If the AT mode flag is set in step S616, the process proceeds to step S618. In step S618, the instruction monitor 68 instructs the instruction monitor 68 to notify the pressing order corresponding to the sixth minor winning combination as a predetermined operation sequence among the operating sequences corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning winning combinations. to control. Then, in step S619, the process of setting the pressing order notification command for the 6th minor combination, which is set so as to include information on the operation order corresponding to the 6th minor combination winning, as an output target to the display control device 81. is executed, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if the game in which the bell is won in the pressing order among the operation mode hands is in the AT mode, the instruction monitor 68 can establish the first to sixth minor role wins. is notified of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that enable the operation, and a push order notification command including information on the operation order is output to the display control device 81, and the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed. done. On the other hand, if the game in which the pressing order bell is won is not in the AT mode, although the command monitor 68 notifies that the pressing order bell is being played, the first to sixth minor winning combinations are established. Since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that enables the operation is not notified, and the push order notification command including information on the operation order is not output to the display control device 81, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the push order notification effect. is not performed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the lottery result command setting process of step S311 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), in a game in which the push order bell is won, any result (IV11 to IV22) of the push order bells is selected. The information as to whether or not the prize has been won is prevented from being output to the display control device 81. - 特許庁

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36(a), in step S1101, the current game is won with the index value IV=11 to 22, and it is determined whether any of the bells in the order of pushing have been won. determine whether If the pressing order bell is not won, in step S1102, after executing the process of setting the lottery result command corresponding to each winning result as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result command setting process is terminated. . That is, in step S1102, for example, when the index value IV=1 is won, a lottery result command indicating normal reply A is set, and when the index value I=8 is won, cherry A is indicated. A lottery result command is set, and in the case of winning with index value IV=27, a lottery result command indicating a special combination is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1101 that one of the bells in the order of pressing is won, a lottery result command indicating the bell group in the order of pressing is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1103. After executing the process, the lottery result command setting process is terminated. The lottery result command indicating the pressing order bell group includes information indicating that one of the pressing order bells has been won. Information about winning 1 (information about winning with IV = 11) and information about winning middle reverse bell 2 (information about winning with IV = 18) information) is set so as not to include information such as

In other words, as shown in FIG. 36(b), in the present embodiment, the information indicating that the pressing order bell has been won is a lottery result command indicating the pressing order bell group regardless of whether the AT mode is in progress. is output to the display control device 81 as. In the AT mode, the pressing order notification commands for the first to sixth minor winning combinations are output together, so that the display control device 81 can execute the pressing order notification effect. On the other hand, when not in the AT mode, the display control device 81 does not output the pressing order notification command for the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination, and as described above, the lottery result indicating the pressing order bell group. Since only commands are output, on the side of the display control device 81, the stop switch 42 capable of establishing the first to sixth minor winning prizes when the bell is pressed in order of winning despite not being in the AT mode. 44 operation order cannot be comprehended. By doing so, the command output from the main controller 101 to the display control device 81 and the display control device 81 may be illegally analyzed, etc. It is possible to prevent cheating and the like of trying to enjoy the benefit of making it possible to establish the first to sixth minor winning prizes when winning the order bell.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, if a special role is won in the AT mode, the pressing order notification for the 6th minor role winning among the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning and the 33rd minor role winning is notified. It is executed by the instruction monitor 68 and outputs a push order notification command for winning the 6th minor combination. By doing so, during the AT mode, the 33rd minor winning combination, which is the side with the smaller number of payouts, is not the 33rd minor winning combination, which is the side with the smaller number of payouts. 6 minor wins can be established, and the advantage of the AT mode can be improved.

Not only that, it instructs the notification of the pressing order for the 6th minor winning combination, which is one predetermined minor winning combination (push order) among the 1st minor winning winning to the 6th minor winning winning on the side with the larger number of payouts. It is executed on the monitor 68, and outputs a push order notification command for winning the sixth minor combination. By doing so, there is no need for the process of selecting which one of the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination is to be established when the special role is won, and the processing can be greatly simplified. It is possible to plan

Furthermore, as described above, if the special role winning is in the AT mode, it will be subject to an additional lottery in the AT addition process in the lottery result correspondence process, and the winning probability of the extra lottery when the special role is won is pushed. It is set to be higher than the winning probability of the extra lottery when the order bell is won, and when the special role is won, the probability of winning is 10%, but when the pushing order bell is won, it is set so that the additional lottery is not won. In this case, when a special role is won in the AT mode, the pressing order for the 6th minor role winning among the 1st minor role winning to 6th minor role winning pressing order information notified when the pressing order bell is won In addition to outputting the pressing order notification command for the sixth minor winning combination among the pushing order reporting commands for the first to sixth minor winning combinations output when the pressing order bell is won. Therefore, it is possible to skillfully mix the winning of a special role in the AT mode with the winning of the winning order of the bell, and it is possible to give the impression that an additional lottery is being conducted based on the winning of the winning order of the bell. Become. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention when winning the bell for pushing order while not excessively increasing the benefits (probability of winning an additional lottery, etc.) when winning the bell for pushing order.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S1202. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S1203. That is, the processing of steps S1201 to S1203 is processing corresponding to the processing of steps S601 to S603, and it is determined whether or not it is one specific prescribed number that is prescribed in association with the gaming state. processing. If it is not the specific specified number, the processing for the winning result is terminated without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step S1204.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1202 or step S1203 and the number of bets is the specific prescribed number, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag has not been set, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the AT mode winning flag has been set. If neither the AT mode flag nor the AT mode winning flag is set and the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the process advances to step S1206 to execute AT lottery processing at stop.

<Processing for AT lottery at the time of stop>
The stop AT lottery process in step S1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1301, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a special combination. If it is a special role, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the current game is the first operation mode.

As already explained, in a game in which a special role is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor role winning is established, and if operated in the second operation mode, the 1st minor role winning ~ Winning the 6th minor role is established. In this case, the operation timing and operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be temporarily stored in a register or the like, and it may be determined whether or not it is the first operation mode in step S1303, or the winning result may be grasped. By doing so, it is determined that the operation is performed in the first operation mode from the fact that the 33rd minor winning combination has been established (all of the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination have not been established). good too.

In addition, in particular, in the special role, even if it is the first operation mode, the 33rd minor role winning cannot be established, and a configuration that causes a dropout, or the 1st minor role winning even if it is the second operation mode ~ 6th minor winning prize can not be established and in the case of a configuration that causes a dropout, as in the former, the operation timing and operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44 are stored, and the It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which which operation mode is determined from the information. Conversely, as in the present embodiment, if there is a configuration in which the 33rd minor winning combination is not missed in at least the first operation mode, the 33rd minor winning combination is established, so the first operation is performed. It is good to judge that it is operated in the mode, and when the 1st minor winning prize to the 6th minor winning prize are established and the special winning prize is won, the second operating mode is used instead of the first operating mode. It is good also as composition which judges that there was.

In step S1303, when it is determined that the operation is performed in the first operation mode when the special role is won, and when it is determined in step S1302 that the lottery result is other than the special role, the ceiling A process of subtracting the counter is executed, and thereafter, processes such as an AT mode transition lottery are executed in steps S1307 to S1323. On the other hand, in step S1303, when it is determined that the operation is performed in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode when the special combination is won, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter, the AT mode transition lottery, etc. are not performed, and the operation is performed as it is. At the time of stop, the process for AT lottery is ended.

That is, as described above, when the special role is won, the 33rd minor role winning is established by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode. By doing so, in the configuration in which the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination, in which the number of medals paid out is larger than the 33rd minor winning combination, is established, the ceiling counter subtraction process and the AT mode transition lottery are performed in the first operation mode. , etc. are executed, in the case of the second operation mode, the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter, the AT mode transition lottery, etc. are not executed. In addition, in the AT lottery process at the start, AT mode shift lottery, CZ mode shift lottery, etc., based on winning a special role are not performed. Therefore, when the special combination is won, the number of medals to be paid out increases when the operation is performed in the second operation mode rather than in the first operation mode. is performed in a more restricted manner than in the case of In this way, the game is diversified as a game feature that allows the player to select which benefit to enjoy.

In the ceiling counter subtraction process, a subtraction value lottery process is executed in step S1304. In the subtraction value lottery process, the ceiling subtraction value table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and the value to be subtracted from the ceiling counter in the current game is determined by lottery based on the lottery result grasped in step S1301. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, 1 to 100 are set as the subtraction value, and basically 1 is likely to be selected in the lottery results other than the special role, including the lost result, as a so-called rare role. is set so that a subtraction value larger than 1 may be subtracted from the ceiling counter when a special combination is won. On the other hand, when a special role is won, the probability of selecting a subtraction value larger than 1 is higher than when a special role is won.

After executing the subtraction value lottery process in step S1304, the process of setting the subtraction value command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1305. The subtraction value command contains information on the subtraction value of the current game. Thereafter, in step S1306, a process of subtracting the subtraction value drawn in step S1304 from the ceiling counter is executed. Incidentally, when the ceiling counter reaches 0, the AT mode win flag is set in the AT lottery process at the start of the next game, as described above. In step S1306, if the current subtraction value is greater than the remaining number of the ceiling counter, the ceiling counter is set to 0 so as not to become a negative value. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of errors caused by negative values. However, if the current subtraction value is larger than the remaining number of the ceiling counter, it may be configured to cause an advantageous event for the player, and an advantageous event may be determined according to the difference between the remaining number and the subtraction value. may occur, or the types of favorable events may differ. Advantageous events include, for example, adding an AT mode to the set, making it easier to select the second AT mode, which is advantageous as a type of AT mode, generating an effect suggesting setting values, and displaying a rare image. can be considered.

After subtracting the ceiling counter at step S1306, AT mode lottery processing is executed at steps S1307 to S1311. That is, in step S1307, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag or the CZ mode winning flag is set. If none of the flags is set, in step S1308, a process of acquiring a lottery table for normal AT mode transition at stop from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag or the CZ mode winning flag is set, and if the CZ mode is in progress or the transition to the CZ mode is confirmed, in step S1309, from the various table storage areas 105a, AT for CZ when stopping Execute the process of acquiring the mode transition lottery table.

As shown in FIG. 39, the normal AT mode transition lottery table for stopping and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ when stopping are set so that an AT mode transition lottery can be won in the case of a special combination, as shown in FIG. , other lottery results are set so as not to win the AT mode transition. This is because, in the lottery results other than the special role, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the AT lottery process at the start, and by doing this, the transition lottery is duplicated at the start and stop. We are trying not to increase the ball output rate by being caught. Also, when comparing the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use at stop and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at stop time, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ than for normal use, as with the start time. is set to

The relationship between the appearance rate (winning probability) of each lottery result in the 3-bet game and the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery result will be described with reference to FIG.

As already explained, in the AT lottery process at the start, the lottery result with the lower appearance rate in each game is set so that the AT mode shift is more likely to be won. Chance A wins the AT mode shift with a probability of 3% in the CZ mode, and chance B, which appears with a probability of about 1/262, wins the AT mode shift with a probability of 5% in the CZ mode. In this case, in the CZ mode, the probability of winning the AT mode transition with the second chance A as a trigger is about 1/5460, and the probability of winning the AT mode transition with the second chance B as the trigger is about 1/5240. . On the other hand, in the stop AT lottery process, when a special role is won, which appears with a probability of about 1/20, by operating in the first operation mode, the AT mode shifts with a probability of about 1/40. The probability of winning and winning the AT mode transition with the special role as a trigger in the CZ mode is about 1/200.

In other words, the ratio of the special role that triggers the AT mode transition win is set to be overwhelmingly higher than the other results. Specifically, in the CZ mode, about 200 AT mode transition wins with a 1/1 probability, AT mode transition wins with a probability of about 1/178 with a non-special role as a trigger, and about half of the CZ mode wins AT mode transition with a special role as a trigger become.

However, as described above, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode in the game in which the special role is won, the AT mode transition lottery itself is not performed, so the AT mode transition In terms of game characteristics aiming at winning, it is more advantageous for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode when winning a special role even if the number of medals paid out is small.

After acquiring each transition lottery table, an AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S1310. Then, in step S1311, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition has been won.

If the AT mode transition is won, the process for AT mode winning is executed in steps S1312 to S1315. Execute the process. After that, in steps S1320 to S1323, the process for the portent mode is executed, and then the AT lottery process at the time of stop ends. The processing of steps S1312 to S1323 is the same as the processing of steps S809 to S820 in the starting AT lottery process.

Also in the stop AT lottery process, when the AT mode shift win or the CZ mode shift win is won, the number of predictive games is set and a predictive command is output. Then, when the AT mode transition wins during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to zero. In this case, in the predictive game number process (step S1208) executed subsequent to the AT lottery process at the time of stop, the process for starting the AT mode from the next game is performed. In other words, even if you win the AT mode transition in the AT lottery process at the start of the CZ mode, and if you win the AT mode transition in the AT lottery process at the time of stop, the AT will be the same in this game. The fact that the player has won the mode transition is notified, and the AT mode is started from the next game.

Returning to the description of the winning result handling process (FIG. 37).

If it is determined in step S1205 that the AT mode transition lottery has already been won, and if the stop AT lottery process is executed in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. If the portent flag is set, in step S1208, the portent game number processing is executed, and then the winning result handling processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the precursor flag is not set in step S1207, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in step S1209. If the CZ mode flag is set and the CZ mode is in progress, the process for the number of CZ games is executed in step S1210, and then the winning result handling process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1209, the winning result handling process is terminated.

If the AT mode flag is set in step S1204 and the AT mode is in progress, the process for the number of AT games is executed in step S1211, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

The number of precursor games, the number of CZ games, and the number of AT games will be described below.

<Processing for Number of Precursor Games>
In the portent game number processing, as shown in FIG. 41, processing for subtracting 1 from the portent counter is executed in step S1401. In addition, when the number of precursor games is set to 0 in the process for setting the number of precursor games in the AT lottery process at the start and the AT lottery process at stop (when 0 is input to the precursor counter) , the precursor counter is not decremented in step S1401. Then, in step S1402, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter is 0, and if it is not 0, the precursor mode processing is terminated. If the precursor counter is 0, the process of clearing the precursor flag is executed in step S1403.

In the following step S1404, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set, thereby grasping whether or not the current portent mode has been shifted based on the winning of the AT mode shift lottery. If the AT mode winning flag is not set and the current portent mode is based on winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, processing for clearing the CZ mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step S1406, a CZ mode flag is set, and in step S1407, a process of inputting 10 as a predetermined number to the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. After that, in step S1408, after executing the process of setting the CZ start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this portent mode process ends. Upon receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 notifies the winning of the CZ mode transition lottery and controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify the start of the CZ mode.

If the AT mode winning flag is set in step S1404 and the current portent mode is a portent mode based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S1409. Execute. Then, in step S1410, a process of setting an AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. In subsequent step S1411, a continuation rate setting process is executed. As described above, the AT mode in the present embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a set of a predetermined number of games is set, and in a situation where there is no remaining number of sets (a situation in which the AT set counter is 0), a set is played. The AT mode continues until the continuous lottery is not won, and the continuation rate setting process in step S1411 is a process of setting the winning probability (continuation rate) of the continuous lottery.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the selection rate of a plurality of continuation rates (90%, 60%, 10%) is set differently according to the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. , and in step S1411, it is determined by lottery which continuation rate is to be selected based on the set value. Specifically, basically, the higher the set value (the higher the set value for the payout rate), the higher the continuation rate is set to be more likely to be selected. is selected with a probability of 30% at setting 6, it is selected with a probability of 70% at setting 6. However, the continuation rate of 90% is more likely to be selected with the odd number setting than with the even number setting, and the setting value of 5 is the most likely to be selected. When a continuation rate of 90% is selected, a 90% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and when a continuation rate of 60% is selected, a 60% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. However, if the continuation rate of 10% is selected, a 10% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) indicating each of these continuation rates is a flag that is cleared when the AT mode to be shifted this time ends. That is, once the continuation rate of the AT mode is set, the continuation lottery for each set is performed at that continuation rate until the AT mode ends.

After executing the continuation rate setting process in step S1411, the process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed in step S1412. As described above, the AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games until one set of AT mode is completed, and is decremented by one each time one game is completed. Then, if the continuation condition is satisfied when the AT game counter becomes 0, the predetermined number of 18 is input to the AT game counter again, and when the AT game counter becomes 0, the continuation condition is satisfied. If not, the AT mode will end.

After that, in step S1412, a process of setting the AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and the precursor mode process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform an effect corresponding to the start of the AT mode. In this case, the AT mode will be started from the game next to the game that ends this time.

<CZ game number processing>
In the CZ game number processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, processing for subtracting 1 from the CZ game counter is executed in step S1501. In subsequent step S1502, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1501. If the CZ game counter is not 0, the CZ mode processing is terminated.

If the CZ game counter is 0, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S1503. After that, in step S1504, processing for setting the CZ end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this CZ mode processing is ended. Upon receiving the CZ end command, the display control device 81 controls so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are notified that the CZ mode has ended.

As already explained, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends at that point and shifts to the portent mode. Therefore, when the CZ mode is terminated by clearing the CZ mode flag in step S1503, it means that the AT mode transition lottery was not won during the CZ mode.

<Processing for the number of AT games>
In the AT game count process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, the AT game counter is decremented by 1 in step S1601. In subsequent step S1602, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1601. If the AT game counter is not 0, the AT mode processing is terminated.

If the AT game counter is 0, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set and the continuation condition is satisfied, the processing for shifting to the next set (steps S1604 to S1606) is executed. On the other hand, if the continuation flag is not set in step S1603, processing for ending the AT mode (steps S1607 to S1610) is executed.

If the continuation condition is satisfied in step S1603, processing for clearing the continuation flag is executed in step S1604. Then, in step S1604, a process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed, and in step S1606, a process of setting a set update command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this AT mode process is executed. exit. The display control device 81 that has received the set update command executes processing for updating the effects of the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 in response to the shift to the set of the AT mode.

On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied in step S1603, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1607, and the continuation rate information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) is cleared in step S1608. Execute the process. Then, in step S1609, processing for setting an AT mode end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. After that, in step S1610, after executing a process of setting an AT end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the AT mode process is ended. The AT mode end flag is a flag for ending the advantageous section when the AT mode ends. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode end command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to perform an effect corresponding to the end of the AT mode.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first processing>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates the case in which, among the advantageous sections, the specific section satisfies at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1703. Then, in step S1704, processing for setting an advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1705, the number of games played during the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. The number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous section. Then, in step S1706, an advantageous section transition process is executed. The advantageous section transition processing is processing for setting the state and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section to be transitioned to this time. Specifically, in the advantageous section transition process, the ceiling counter is set by lottery or the like, and the number of ceiling games that allows the transition to the AT mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery after the advantageous section transition is set. I do. The lottery for the ceiling counter is preferably performed using, for example, the set value or the lottery result of the game. It is preferable to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games, or to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games as the result of the lottery result of the current game is less likely to win. A value corresponding to the number of ceiling games determined by lottery may be input to the ceiling counter. For example, by outputting a ceiling command including information corresponding to the ceiling counter to the display control device 81, the number of ceiling games is indicated. A production may be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the maximum number of ceiling games is set to 700. In other words, after shifting to the advantageous section, the ceiling counter is normally set to 0 by playing at least 700 games, and the AT mode winning flag is set.

However, as described above, when each game is not played with a specific prescribed number of bets, the ceiling counter is not subtracted, and when a special winning combination is won, the game is stopped in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode. The ceiling counter is not decremented even when the switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, even if the number of games actually played reaches 700 or more, the ceiling counter may not reach 0 and the AT mode winning flag may not be set. In addition, the subtraction value of the ceiling counter may be a value larger than 1 in each game, and the ceiling counter is set before the number of games corresponding to the ceiling counter value set at the time of transition to the advantageous section is completed. may be 0.

In the first section display processing, after the advantageous section transition processing is executed in step S1706, the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8 in step S1707.

If it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1708 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1708, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set, after the display start processing is executed in step S1707 or after the display continuation processing is executed in step S1708, AT mode is executed in step S1709. Determine whether the flag is set. If it is determined in step S1709 that none of the AT mode flags have been set, then in step S1710 a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1709 that any AT mode flag is set, in step S1711, the processing of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Execute. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1710 or step S1711, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1712. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1713, a process for displaying the calculation result of step S1712 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a five-digit number. there is

In step S1713, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1712 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1713, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1712. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process that is executed in step S416 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second processing is terminated. If the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S1802, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. In the subsequent step S1803, update processing of the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process in step S1803, on the condition that the game result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of inputs (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S1803, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1804, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1805. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, if the total number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games completed in the advantageous section) and the AT game counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. grasp whether or not In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation, and a first excess flag containing information indicating that the first excess flag has been set is set. An excess command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is the increase/decrease number in the advantageous zone. Know if there are more situations. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation, and a second excess flag containing information indicating that the second excess flag is set is set. An excess command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 .

After executing the number-of-remaining-games management process and the number-of-remaining-numbers management process, in step S1806, it is determined whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY is increased to the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the number is 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step S1807. In the subsequent step S1808, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S1809, after executing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second section display processing ends.

Specifically, regarding the initialization processing of the advantageous section information in step S1809, the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section are initialized. Execute the process to return to For example, if the advantageous section flag, various AT mode flags, etc. are not cleared but set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the AT preparation counter, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. That is, in this advantageous interval information initialization process, all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous interval as an advantageous state using the push order notification. This is a process of clearing the RAM for variables and parameters.

If it is determined in step S1806 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and that the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process advances to step S1810, and the AT mode end flag is set. Determine whether or not If the AT mode end flag is set, the process advances to step S1807 to execute advantageous section end processing. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the processing for ending the advantageous section is executed as it is.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1902. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, or after the processing of step S1902 has been executed, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of normal processing. If it is a command at the time of betting, at step S1904, effect setting processing at the time of betting for setting the effect based on the current betting operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, or if the process of step S1904 has been executed, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main control unit 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the command corresponding to the lottery result There are an omen command, a continuation command, a set additional command, a push order notification command, etc., which are set in the processing (FIG. 27). In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1906.

If a negative determination is made in step S1905, or if the process of step S1906 has been executed, it is determined in step S1907 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S1908, effect setting processing at each stop operation for setting the effect based on the current stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1907, or if the process of step S1908 has been executed, it is determined in step S1909 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S419 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to commands, the 1st BB start command, the 2nd BB start command, the 1st BB end command, the 2nd BB end command, the precursor command, and CZ, which are set in the bonus state processing (Fig. 24), winning result handling processing (Fig. 36), etc. There are a start command, an AT start command, a CZ end command, a set update command, an AT end command, and the like. In the case of these all-stop commands, in step S1910, all-stop effect setting processing is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1909, or after the processing of step S1910 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1911, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1911, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step S1911, effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.) are set, and without the main controller 101 Set effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to , set for error notification, etc.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step S1906 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the received lottery result command is a lottery result command indicating a pressing order bell group. As already explained, in the lottery result command setting process (FIG. 36(a)) in this embodiment, when any of the pressing order bells is selected, the pressing order bell group is set instead of the lottery result command indicating the individual result. It is configured to output the lottery result command shown. In step S2001, a lottery result command indicating the pressing order bell group has been received, and if it is a game in which one of the pressing order bells has been won, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not any pressing order notification command has been received. As already explained, when one of the bells in the order of pressing is won during the AT mode, the operation of establishing the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination according to the type of the winning bell in the order of pressing. A pressing order notification command corresponding to the order is output (see FIG. 36(b)). If any of the pressing order notification commands have been received, settings are made in step S2003 so that the corresponding pressing order notification effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. FIG.

If it is determined in step S2001 that the lottery result command indicating the pressing order bell group has not been received, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the lottery result command indicating the special role has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2004 and the lottery result of this game is a special role, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not a push order notification command has been received. As already explained, in a game in which a special role is won during the AT mode, the pressing order notification command corresponding to the operation order for establishing the 6th minor role winning among the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning is issued. It is configured to be output (see FIG. 36(b)). If the push order notification command has been received, the process advances to step S2003 to perform setting for performing the push order notification effect for the sixth minor winning combination on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

If it is determined in step S2004 that a lottery result command indicating a special combination has not been received, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not a lottery result command indicating any specific combination has been received. As already explained, the specific combination is a lottery result called a so-called rare combination that is difficult to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game. A to Cherry C and Watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 30, in the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process at the start triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set higher than other lottery results. In addition, in the AT mode extra lottery, when the special role is won, the extra lottery can be won, but when the normal role such as the normal reply A is won, the extra lottery cannot be won. When the lottery result of the game this time is that the specific combination is won, a process of setting the specific combination notification effect is executed in step S2007. In the setting processing of the specific role notification effect, setting is executed so that the specific role notification that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above specific roles is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. . As the special combination notification, for example, an effect is set such that three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided.

If a negative determination is made in step S2002, step S2005, or step S2006, or if the process of step S2003 or step S2007 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, an indication effect setting process at the start is executed. In the start-time portent effect setting process, based on the portent command set for output in the start-time AT lottery processing in the main control device 101, the process of setting the portent mode is executed, and the portent effect of each game in the portent mode is executed. Execute the processing to set the effect. Such start-time portent effect setting processing will be described later in detail.

In the subsequent step S2009, it is determined whether or not the sub-side CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The sub-side CZ flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the CZ mode is in progress. When the sub-side CZ flag is set, in step S2010, start CZ effect setting processing is executed. In the starting CZ effect setting process, a process of setting the effect of the game to be started this time is executed according to the lottery result of each game in the CZ mode. The start CZ effect setting process will also be described later in detail.

When a negative determination is made in step S2009, or after executing the processing of step S2010, AT effect setting processing is executed in step S2010. In the AT effect setting process, in a set management type AT mode in which a predetermined number of 18 games is set as one set, for example, a friendly character and an enemy character face each other, and if the set continuation condition is satisfied, the friendly character wins, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, a process of setting a battle performance in which the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins is executed as a performance in one set. In this case, for example, in each of the 10 games in the first half of one set of games, a confrontation effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character face each other is set to be performed, and in each of the 8 games in the latter half, a confrontation effect is performed. A process for setting a battle production in which a character and an enemy character confront each other is executed.

After the AT effect setting process is executed in step S2011, another start effect setting process is executed in step S2012, and then the start effect setting process is terminated. In step S2012, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. is executed. do.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop of step S1910 in the effect setting process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, in the all-stop effect setting process, the newly received commands are the winning result command, the 1st BB start command, the 2nd BB start command, the 1st BB end command, the 2nd BB end command, the portent command, and the CZ start command. , AT start command, CZ end command, set update command, AT end command, etc., this is a process for setting effects.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not a CZ start command has been received. When the CZ start command is received, in step S2102, the sub-side CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and in step S2103, the CZ start effect is displayed as an effect when betting the next game, and an auxiliary display is performed. Effect setting processing to be performed by the unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 50( a ), the CZ start effect displays that the CZ mode will start from the current game and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode (10) on the auxiliary display section 65 . That is, when the CZ start command is received as the stop time command, after the game ends, the CZ start effect is executed based on the betting operation of the next game. By setting the sub-side CZ flag in step S2102, an affirmative determination is made in step S2009 in the start effect setting process of the next game, and the start CZ effect setting process is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2104 whether or not the sub-side CZ flag has already been set. If it has already been set and the game to be ended this time is a game in the CZ mode, then in step S2105, a stop CZ effect setting process is executed. The stop-time CZ effect setting process is a process for correcting, at the end of the game, the effect in the CZ mode set in the start-time CZ effect setting process at the start of the game. The stop CZ effect setting process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S2104, it is determined whether or not an AT start command has been received in step S2106. If the AT start command has been received, the sub-side AT flag is set in the flag storage area 183a in step S2107, and the AT start process is executed in step S2108. In the AT start process, for example, a process of inputting the number of games of the set to be started into a game number counter for grasping the number of games played in each set in the AT mode, or grasping the number of consecutive sets. Also, as a betting effect for the next game, a process for performing an AT start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For the AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(a), an effect is set in which a display indicating that the AT mode is started (character display such as "AT start") is performed. That is, when the AT start command is received as the stop time command, after the game ends, the AT start effect is executed based on the betting operation of the next game. In the AT start effect, for example, the background or sound effect may be set differently according to the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started so as to suggest the continuation rate.

If a negative determination is made in step S2106, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not an AT end command has been received. If the AT end command is received, in step S2110 the process of clearing the sub-side AT flag is executed, and in step S2111 the effect setting process for performing the AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed. Execute. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the AT end effect displays a message indicating that the AT mode will end (character display such as "see you later"), and notifies the number of consecutive sets in the current AT mode and the number of medals won. is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2109, it is determined in step S2112 whether or not a set update command has been received. When a set update command has been received and one set in the AT mode is completed and the next set is to be performed, a set update process is executed in step S2113. In the set update process, the process of clearing the information regarding whether or not there are conditions for continuing the previous set at the start of the current set is executed, and the process of inputting the number of games in the current set into the above game number counter is executed. or

If a negative determination is made in step S2112, then in step S2114 a premonition effect setting process at the time of stop is executed. As already explained, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode transition lottery are executed not only at the start of the game but also at the end of the game, and based on the result, the portent command can be output. The stop-time portent effect setting process executes processing for setting various effects in the portent mode based on the portent command output at the end of the game. Such a stop portent mode setting process will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S2103, step S2105, step S2108, step S2111, step S2113 or step S2114, the number of games management processing is executed in step S2115. The number-of-games management process is a process of managing the number of games up to the ceiling from the transition to the advantageous section until winning the AT mode transition, and setting an effect when the ceiling is reached. Such game function processing will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S2115, after executing the other effect setting process at the time of all stop at step S2116, the present effect setting process at the time of all stop is finished. In step S2116, processing is performed to perform effects corresponding to various commands output at the start and end of the BB, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, and the winning combination is executed. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts, or the speaker 64 is controlled to emit sound effects corresponding to automatic bets during replay.

<Overview of CZ production>
Before describing the CZ effect setting process at the start and the CZ effect setting process at the stop, an overview of the effects of each game in the CZ mode in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54 and the like.

As already explained, in the CZ mode in this embodiment, it is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than in the normal mode. Then, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 games, the fact that the AT mode shift is won in the game is notified, and the AT mode starts from the next game. I'm trying to be In other words, in the present embodiment, a complete notification type notification mode is adopted in which the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified in each game during the CZ mode. By doing so, the flow of the game from the CZ mode to the AT mode can be made smoother, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of each game during the CZ mode.

As a specific effect of each game in the CZ mode, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variable areas for numerical characters are provided in the auxiliary display section 65, and a predetermined combination of numerical characters that stop in the plurality of variable areas is displayed. As a result, the fact that the AT mode shift lottery is won is notified. In this embodiment, a predetermined combination is set when characters with the same number are stopped to form double eyes. For example, as shown in FIGS. 54(a1) to 54(c1), the auxiliary display section 65 sets a left variation area SP1, a middle variation area SP2, and a right variation area SP3 sequentially from the left as the variation areas of the numeric characters. Numerical characters from 1 to 9 are set as numerical characters to be displayed in these variable areas SP1 to SP3. Then, when each game is started, the numerical characters in these variable areas SP1 to SP3 are displayed, for example, vertically variably, and each time the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the numerical characters are displayed in order from the left. to stop FIG. 54(a1) shows how the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop the numeric characters in the left variation area SP1, and FIG. 54(b1) shows the middle variation area by operating the middle stop switch 43. 54(c1) shows how the right stop switch 44 is operated and the number characters stop in the right fluctuation area SP3. In this case, in FIG. 54, the same number "1" character is stopped in the left fluctuation area SP1 and the middle fluctuation area SP2, but the character "4" different from the left middle number is stopped in the right fluctuation area SP3. characters are stopped, indicating that the predetermined combination has not been formed. In other words, the fact that the player has not won the AT mode transition lottery is notified.

Here, the stop switches 42 to 44 are provided so as to be displaceable from an initial position arranged on the front side of the slot machine 10 to an operation position arranged on the back side. The stop switches 42 to 44 are urged by a spring or the like as urging means from the operating position toward the initial position, and are arranged at the initial position before being operated. By pressing the stop switches 42 to 44 arranged at the initial position toward the operating position and applying a force that exceeds the biasing force of the biasing means to the inner side, the stop switches 42 to 44 are directed toward the operating position. displacement. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are released, they return to the initial position by the biasing force of the biasing means.

The detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a to the main controller 101 change from the OFF state to the ON state when the stop switches 42 to 44 are displaced from the initial positions to the operating positions, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are changed to the operating positions. to the initial position, the ON state changes to the OFF state. The main controller 101 grasps that the detection signals from the stop switches 42 to 44 rise from the OFF state to the ON state, thereby grasping that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been displaced from the initial positions toward the operating positions. By grasping that the detection signals from the stop switches 42 to 44 fall from the ON state to the OFF state, it is grasped that the stop switches 42 to 44 are displaced from the operating position toward the initial position. becomes possible.

In the following description, operating the stop switches 42 to 44 from the initial position toward the operating position is also referred to as stop ON operation, and operating the stop switches 42 to 44 from the operating position toward the initial position (hand etc.) is also referred to as a stop OFF operation. The first stop ON operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the first stop ON operation, the first stop OFF operation is the first stop OFF operation, the second stop ON operation is the second stop ON operation, and the second stop ON operation is the second stop ON operation. The stop OFF operation is called a second stop OFF operation, the third stop ON operation is called a third stop ON operation, and the third stop OFF operation is called a third stop OFF operation.

In the effect during the CZ mode, the stop of the numerical character in each of the variable areas SP1-SP3 is executed based on the stop ON operation among the operations of the stop switches 42-44. That is, as shown in FIG. 54(a2), by stopping and turning on the left stop switch 42, the number character stops in the left fluctuation area SP1, and as shown in FIG. 54(b2), the middle stop switch 43 54(c2), the number character stops in the middle variation area SP2, and the number character stops in the right variation area SP3 by stopping and turning on the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 54(c2). stops.

When the first stop ON operation is performed, the number characters stop in the left fluctuation area SP1. When the second stop ON operation is performed, the number characters stop in the middle fluctuation area SP2. characters stop, and each of the variable regions SP1-SP3 where the number characters stop is associated with the stop order of the stop switches 42-44 on a one-to-one basis. . . . SP3 may be associated with each of the stop switches 42-44 on a one-to-one basis. Specifically, for example, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated as the first stop ON operation, the number character stops in the middle fluctuation area SP2, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated as the second stop ON operation, the right fluctuation area The number characters may stop in SP3, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated as the third stop ON operation, the number characters may stop in the left fluctuation area SP1.

<CZ effect setting process at start>
The start time CZ effect setting process of step S2010 in the start time effect setting process (FIG. 48) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the sub-side CZ flag is set. If the sub-side CZ flag is not set, the main starting CZ effect setting process is terminated. When the sub-side CZ flag is set, in step S2202, update processing of the CZ game number display is executed. The number of games in the CZ mode is managed by the stop time CZ effect setting process. , is configured to be updated at the start of the game. In step S2202, according to the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the corresponding number-of-remaining-games image GP is read from the storage area of the ROM 182, and the auxiliary display section 65 is controlled so that the updated number-of-remaining-games image GP is displayed. .

After executing the CZ game number display updating process, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not a lottery result command indicating a specific combination has been received as a command at the start of the current game. If a lottery result command indicating a specific role has been received, in step S2204, as an effect during the CZ mode of the current game, the number character to be stopped when the first stop ON operation is performed, and the number character to be stopped when the second stop ON operation is performed. A number character is set so as to perform a tenpai effect (FIG. 55(a)) in which the number character is the same number character. By performing the tenpai effect, it is possible to heighten expectations for the formation of a predetermined combination corresponding to the AT mode transition win as described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2203 that the lottery result command indicating the special combination has not been received, the process advances to step S2205 to determine whether or not the lottery result command indicating the special combination has been received. If the lottery result command indicating the special role has not been received, and the lottery result of the current game is neither the specific role nor the special role, then in step S2206, an omen command is received as a command at the start of the current game. determine whether or not there is As already explained, in the AT lottery process at the start, when the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won, the portent command is set to be output, but the portent command is received during the CZ mode. If you do, it means that you have won the AT mode transition lottery for this game. Also, if the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 games, so the AT mode is started from the game following the current game.

When the portent command is received in step S2206, the process advances to step S2204 to set an effect so that the above tenpai effect is performed by the first stop ON operation and the second stop ON operation. On the other hand, if the portent command has not been received, the process advances to step S2207 to execute normal tenpai effect lottery processing. In the normal ten-pie effect lottery process, for example, regardless of the lottery result of the current game, a lottery is performed so that the ten-pie effect occurs with a probability of about 5%. Then, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won in the lottery process of the ten pie effect, and if the lottery has been won, the process advances to step S2204 to perform the ten pie effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2208 that the lottery process for the ten-pie effect was not won, in step S2209 the number character to be stopped when the first stop ON operation is performed and the character to be stopped when the second stop ON operation is performed. Setting is made so that a separate effect (FIG. 55(b)) is performed in which the number characters are different. By performing the separated effect, it is possible to reduce the expectation for the formation of the predetermined combination corresponding to the winning of the AT mode transition as described above.

After the setting is made in step S2204 so that the tenpai effect is performed in the first stop ON operation and the second stop ON operation, it is determined in step S2210 whether or not the portent command has been received. If an omen command has been received and the result of the AT mode shift lottery of the current game is a winning result, whether to generate a bomb effect based on the third stop ON operation of the current game in step S2211. A lottery will determine whether or not

The bomb effect, as shown in FIG. 57(a), is a effect of stopping a numeric character in the right variation area SP3 and displaying a bomb character (bomb image BP) as a third stop ON effect. In the bomb effect, after that, after the third stop OFF operation is performed, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a), a non-explosion effect is executed in which the bomb image BP is not exploded and the non-exploded image NP is displayed. When the bomb effect is switched to the explosion effect, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the state in which the predetermined combination is not formed in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 is switched to the state in which the predetermined combination is formed. At the same time as notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery is performed, as shown in FIG. 58(b), an AT winning effect is performed. On the other hand, when the non-explosive bomb effect is executed, as shown in FIG. As a notification that the mode transition lottery was not won, a loss re-display effect is performed.

Here, the bomb image BP is set so as to be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the number characters in the right variation area SP3. Specifically, the bomb image BP is displayed in front of the number characters in the middle variation area SP2. While overlapping with the character of the number concerned, it is displayed at a position not overlapping with the character of the number in the right variation area SP3 and also not overlapping with the character of the number in the left variation area SP1. By doing so, by displaying the bomb image BP, it becomes difficult or impossible to comprehend the numeric character in the right fluctuation area SP3 that is stopped when the third stop ON operation is performed. can be preferably avoided.

On the other hand, the explosion image EP (FIG. 57(b)) is displayed in front of the numerical characters stopped in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 so as to overlap these numerical characters. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the explosion image EP is set to be displayed to such an extent that the number characters cannot be visually recognized. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity when a predetermined combination of numeric characters is formed after an explosion.

In the winning bomb effect lottery process in step S2211, it is determined whether or not to generate the bomb effect according to the lottery result of the game. In the present embodiment, for example, it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery, for example, the lottery triggered by the chance number A among the specific roles is more likely to generate a bomb effect than the lottery triggered by the chance number C. As a result, the explosion production is made to occur more easily. After executing the bomb effect lottery process, it is determined whether or not the bomb effect lottery is won in step S2212. 56(a)) in which a character with the same number as that of the character with the number stopped is stopped and a predetermined combination is formed. Then, in step S2214, the AT win effect (FIG. 56(b)) is set to be performed based on the third stop OFF operation of the current game, and then the main starting CZ effect setting process is terminated. The AT winning effect is set so that, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays a soldier's character roaring to congratulate the winning of the AT mode transition.

In step S2212, when the explosion effect lottery at the time of winning the AT mode transition is not won, in step S2215, the character with the number different from the character with the number stopped by the above tenpai effect at the time of the third stop ON operation. 55(a)) is set to be performed. Also, if it is determined in step S2210 that the portent command has not been received, then in step S2216, characters with numbers different from those stopped in the tenpai effect are stopped at the time of the third stop ON operation. 55(a)). Furthermore, in the case where the random number effect is performed instead of the tenpai effect, after the processing of step S2209 is executed, in step S2217, when the third stop ON operation is performed, the random number character is stopped and the random number effect is performed (Fig. 55). Set so that (b)) is performed.

After executing the process of step S2216 or step S2217, the process proceeds to step S2218. In step S2218, it is determined whether or not a special combination flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The special combination flag is a flag that is set in step S2222 when a special combination is won. Since a negative determination is made in step S2205 this time, it is a case where the special combination flag is not set.

In step S2219, it is determined by lottery whether or not to generate a bomb effect based on the third stop ON operation of the current game.

In step S2219, in the bomb effect lottery process when the AT mode transition is not won, it is determined whether or not to generate the bomb effect according to the lottery result of the game. For example, a lottery triggered by a specific role is more likely to generate a bomb performance than a lottery triggered by a role other than a specific role. After executing the bomb effect lottery processing, it is determined whether or not the bomb effect lottery is won in step S2220, and if not, the starting CZ effect setting processing is terminated. If the bomb effect lottery is won, the bomb image BP is set to be displayed based on the third stop ON operation in step S2221, and then this starting CZ effect setting process is terminated.

In this way, in accordance with the lottery result of each game and the result of the AT mode transition lottery executed at the start of the game, it is notified that the AT mode transition lottery has been won by executing the double effect in the variable areas SP1 to SP3. is performed, and the fact that the AT mode shift lottery has not been won is notified by performing a tenpai misplacement performance or a loose performance.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the game is a special combination, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game is the first operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery is performed, but the second operation mode is performed. Then the AT mode transition lottery is not performed. Then, as described above, when a special combination is won, the AT mode shift lottery is not performed in the start AT lottery process, and the AT mode shift lottery is performed in the stop AT lottery process. Therefore, at the start of the CZ mode, it is possible to determine that the player has won the special role, but it is not possible to ascertain whether or not the AT mode shift lottery is successful. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery executed at the time of stop based on the special role is started in advance as the variable display of each of the variable areas SP1 to SO3, and the effect at the time of stop After the AT mode shift lottery is executed, the pre-started performance is set to be corrected in accordance with the result of the AT mode shift lottery.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S2205 that a lottery result command indicating a special combination has been received, a process of setting a special combination flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step S2222. Then, in step S2223, a tenpai effect lottery process for a special role is executed. This tenpai effect lottery process is set so that the winning probability is different from the tenpai effect lottery process in the above step S2207. More specifically, in step S2223, it is set so that the tenpai effect will occur at a probability of 30%.

After the ten-pie effect lottery process is executed in step S2223, it is determined whether or not the ten-pie effect lottery is won in step S2208. I do. By the way, at the time of winning the special role, since the precursor command is not output in the AT lottery process at the start, even if the tenpai effect is performed, the negative determination is made in step S2210, and the process proceeds to step S2216. It is set so that the tenpai out production is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2208 that the ten-pie effect lottery has not been won, a setting is made in steps S2209 and S2217 so that a separate effect is performed.

After executing the process of step S2216 or step S2217, as described above, the process proceeds to step S2218 to determine whether or not the special combination flag is set. Since the special combination flag is set this time, an affirmative determination is made in step S2218, and the process proceeds to step S2221. In step S2221, as described above, the bomb image BP is set to be displayed based on the third stop ON operation.

That is, in the special role winning game, the tenpai performance is set to occur more easily than when the special role is not won, and the bomb performance of displaying the bomb image BP always occurs when the third stop ON operation is performed.

<CZ effect setting process at stop>
Next, the stop time CZ effect setting process of step S2105 in the stop time effect setting process (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the bomb effect is being executed. If the bomb effect is being executed, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not a portent command has been received as the current start command or stop command. As described above, if the precursor command is received during the CZ mode, it is the case that the AT mode transition lottery is won, and if the precursor command is received as the start command, it is AT at the start AT lottery process. In the case where the mode transition lottery is won and the portent command is received as the stop command, the AT mode transition lottery is performed by operating in the first operation mode when the special role is won, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed. This is the case when the winner is elected. Also in this case, since the number of precursor games is set to 0 games, the AT mode is started from the game next to the game that ends this time.

When the portent command is received, in step S2303, an explosion effect (FIG. 57(b)) is performed in which the bomb image BP is switched to the explosion image EP in the current bomb effect. Then, in step S2304, when the explosion effect ends, a double eye effect (FIG. 58(a)) is set to be performed. )) is set to be performed, and then this stop time CZ effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the portent command is not received in step S2302, the flow advances to step S2306 to perform a non-explosion effect (FIG. 59(a)) in which the bomb image BP is switched to the non-exploded image NP in the current bomb effect. set to Then, in step S2307, when the misfire effect is finished, the setting is made so that the loss re-display effect (FIG. 59(b)) in which the originally displayed tenpai misfires and loose dots are displayed is performed.

If it is determined in step S2308 that the bomb effect is not being executed, or if the processing of step S2307 is executed, in step S2308 it is determined whether or not the CZ game number counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is 0. judge. The CZ game number counter receives the number of CZ mode games (10) at the start of the CZ mode. If the CZ game number counter is not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the CZ game number counter is executed in step S2309, and then the main stopping CZ effect setting process is terminated. In this case, at step S2202 in the start time CZ effect setting process, the CZ game number display is updated so that the remaining game number image GP corresponding to the value of the CZ game number counter decremented at step S2309 is displayed. process.

When the CZ game number counter is 0 in step S2308, after executing the processing for setting so that the CZ mode end effect is performed in step S2310, the CZ effect setting processing at the time of stop is ended. As shown in FIG. 50(b), the CZ mode end effect is set such that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode becomes 0 and the end of the CZ mode is notified. When the misfire effect in step S2306 and the failure re-display effect in step S2307 are set, the CZ mode end effect is performed after the misfire effect and the failure re-display effect are performed.

<Direction of special role winning game>
Next, the effect of the special role winning game during the CZ mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 60(a1) shows a case where the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game and the AT mode shift lottery is won, and FIG. 60(b1) shows the special role winning game. This shows a case where the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode in the game and the AT mode shift lottery is not won. As already explained, if the special role winning game is operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor role winning is established and one medal is paid out, while if the special role winning game is operated in the second operation mode Eight medals are paid out when the 1st to 6th minor winning combinations are established.

At ta1, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate based on the operation of the start lever 41. FIG. Then, the lottery process is performed based on the start operation of the ta1, and if the special role is won, the AT mode shift lottery is not won in the start AT lottery process executed at the ta1. In addition, during the CZ mode, the variable display of the number characters in each of the variable regions SP1 to SP3 is started based on the ta1 start operation.

When the first stop ON operation is performed at ta2, as shown in FIG. 60(a2), the number character stops in the left fluctuation area SP1. Further, when the second stop ON operation is performed at ta3, as shown in FIG. 60(a3), the numeric characters stop in the medium fluctuation area SP2. The figure shows a case where the player wins the lottery in the tenpai effect lottery process for the special role (step S2220), and in FIG. 60(a3), the tenpai effect is performed. Then, when the third stop ON operation is performed at ta4, as shown in FIG. 60(a4), the number characters stop in the right variation area SP3 so as to produce a ten-pie-out performance, and the bomb performance is started. be. These effects of FIGS. 60(a2) to 60(a4) are set in the CZ effect setting process at the start, and are set before the AT mode transition lottery at the time of stop based on the special role is performed. equivalent to a performance.

As described above, the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 37) on the main controller 101 side is executed at step S415 in the reel control process (FIG. 22), and is executed after the payout determination process (step S413). That is, the winning result handling process is executed after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and the medal payout based on the stop is completed.

In this case, after the bomb effect is started based on the third stop ON operation at ta4, when the third stop OFF operation is performed at ta5, medal payout based on the 33rd minor win is started. Then, after the medal payout is completed at ta6, the stop AT lottery process is executed, and as a result, the precursor command is received and the bomb effect is switched to the explosion effect at ta6 (FIG. 60(a5)). After that, at ta7, the explosion effect is switched to double eyes effect (FIG. 60(a6)), and AT winning effect is executed at ta8 (FIG. 60(a7)). In this way, the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won in the game started at ta1 (FIG. 60(a7)) is performed. In this case, the AT mode is started from the game following the current game.

When the special role winning game is operated in the second operation mode, as shown in FIG. 60(b1), the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate based on the start operation performed at tb1. Then, based on the first stop ON operation at tb2, the number characters stop in the left fluctuation area SP1 (FIG. 60(b2)), and based on the second stop ON operation at tb3, the number characters stop in the middle fluctuation area SP2. (FIG. 60(b3)), based on the third stop ON operation at tb4, the number characters stop in the right variation area SP3, and the bomb effect is started (FIG. 60(b4)). These effects of FIGS. 60(b2) to 60(b4) are also set in the CZ effect setting process at the start, and are set before the AT mode transition lottery at the time of stop based on the special role is performed. equivalent to a performance.

As described above, if you operate in the second operation mode in the special role winning game, the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning, which has more medals paid out than the 33rd minor role winning, will be established and 8 medals will be awarded. Payment is made.

Then, after performing the third stop OFF operation at tb5, at tb7, which is later than tb6 when the payout of one medal at the time of winning the 33rd minor winning combination is completed, the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are won. The payout of 8 medals based on is completed. That is, the AT lottery process for stopping in the winning result handling process is executed at tb7 after tb6, and the result of the AT mode transition lottery at the time of stopping can also be grasped at tb7.

In this case, the bomb effect started from tb4 is switched to a non-explosion effect at tb7, and after that, the failure re-display effect is performed at tb8, and the result of the AT mode shift lottery for this game was a failure result. is notified.

Although detailed explanation with a figure is omitted, in the case of operating in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, if AT mode transition winning is not won in the AT lottery process at the time of stop, CZ effect at the time of stop of ta6 In the setting process, it is determined that the portent command has not been received, and in this case, the bomb effect is switched to the non-explosion effect at ta6, and after that, the missed re-display effect is displayed at ta7.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the game is a special combination, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game is the first operation mode, one medal can be paid out, While the AT mode transition lottery, which is one of the processes related to the instruction function, is executed, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game is the second operation mode, 8 cards, which is more than the first operation mode. , and the AT mode shift lottery, which is one of the processes related to the instruction function, is not executed. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode in the game of reducing the reduction of the medals held, and it is more advantageous to the player to operate in the first operation mode in the game of aiming to shift to the AT mode. . In this way, since the player can select which game to play, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the diverse needs of the player.

On top of that, in the special role winning game, after setting to perform a bomb effect corresponding to the special role from the start of the game, depending on the result of the AT mode transition lottery performed at the end of the special role winning game Since the bomb effect can be switched between an explosive effect and a non-explosive effect, even if the special role differs in whether or not the processing related to the instruction function is executed or in the execution mode depending on the operation mode, it is possible to win the special role. It is possible to notify the result of the processing related to the instruction function in the new game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification of the result of the processing related to the instruction function from being carried over to the next game and beyond, and as a so-called complete notification type notification mode, it is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention to the notification of the result in each game. It becomes possible.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the AT mode is started from the game following the game in which the transition lottery was won. Even if the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, the AT mode can be started from the next game after notifying the winning of the AT mode shift. Therefore, there is no need to delay the start timing of the AT mode due to the game result or the circumstances of the notification side, and smooth game characteristics can be realized while simplifying the processing.

Since the stop AT lottery process is executed after the payout of medals is completed, the period from the third stop OFF operation to the stop AT lottery process is the second in the special winning game. The case of operating in the first operation mode and the case of operating in the second operation mode in the special role winning game are different. 57(a1) and 57(a2), when the bomb effect is started by the third stop ON operation, after the third stop OFF operation is performed as shown in FIG. 57(b2), , as shown in FIG. 57(b1), the period until the explosion effect occurs is period A (from ta5 to ta6 in FIG. 60) until one medal payout based on the 33rd minor win is completed. On the other hand, when the explosion effect is started by the third stop ON operation, after the third stop OFF operation is performed as shown in FIG. 59(b2), the non-explosion effect occurs as shown in FIG. The period until is the B period (tb5 to tb6 in FIG. 60) until the payout of 8 medals based on the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning is completed, and the B period is better than the A period. set to be long. In this case, the timing at which the bomb effect is switched to the explosion effect for the winning side of the AT mode transition arrives earlier than the timing for switching to the non-explosive effect for the non-winning side to the AT mode transition. In this way, when the AT mode shift winning side performance is performed, it is possible to ensure the time for performing the AT winning performance as well as the double eyes performance using each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the bomb effect is not limited to the special role winning game, but the bomb effect lottery process when the AT mode transition wins (step S2211) and the bomb effect lottery process when the AT mode transition does not win (step S2219). ), the standby period from when the third stop OFF operation is performed to when the stop CZ effect setting process is performed in the situation where the bomb effect is being performed is The length is different according to the lottery result of the game.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61, the waiting period from when the third stop OFF operation is performed in the special role winning game to when the stop CZ effect setting process is performed is 1 in the first operation mode. The A period corresponds to the period during which one medal is paid out, and more specifically, it is about 0.5 sec. On the other hand, the waiting period in the special role winning game is a period corresponding to the period during which eight medals are paid out in the second operation mode, and is a period B that is longer than the period A, and is longer than the period A. Specifically, it is about 4.0 sec.

The waiting period in the watermelon winning game is a period corresponding to the period during which three medals are paid out, and is longer than the A period and shorter than the B period, and is more specifically about 1.5 seconds. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, out of the replay results, the period during which the same number of bets as the number of bets for the game in which the normal response A to C was won in the replay process based on the winning of the normal response A to C is set. , the period in which the same number of bets is set as the number of bets for games in which the chances A to C and cherries A to C are won in the replay processing based on the chances A to C and cherries A to C winning are different. The betting period for the normal replays A to C is set to be longer than the betting period for the chances A to C and the cherry A to C. In addition, the period for betting on the chance numbers A to C and the cherries A to C is set to have the same length as the period during which the same number of medals is paid out. In this way, it gives the impression that the special wins such as the chance numbers A to C and the cherry A to C constituted by the replay results are treated in the same way as the results of the small wins in which medals are paid out, such as the watermelon. It is possible to give the impression that the results are different from the replay results such as Lips A to C.

Then, the above-mentioned waiting period in the normal reply A to C winning game is a period corresponding to the period in which three bets are made, and the D period is longer than the above C period and shorter than the B period in the watermelon winning game. and more specifically about 3.0 sec.

In addition, the above-mentioned waiting period in the chance A to C or cherry A to C winning games is the same length of period as the period in which three medals are paid out, even if it is a period in which three bets are made. , which is the same length as the period C in the watermelon winning game, specifically about 1.5 sec.

These periods A to C are periods in which there is a possibility that the bomb effect will transition to an explosion effect, and thus the period required for payout of medals according to the game result and the period required for setting bets in replay processing. Since the period until the explosion effect occurs is diversified by utilizing the fact that the .

Then, the explosion effect is most likely to occur in the period A of the first operation mode in the special role winning game, and the explosion effect is likely to occur in the period C of the watermelon winning game, the chances A to C, and the cherry A to C winning game. Next, it is set so that the explosion effect is likely to occur during the D period of the normal reply A to C winning game, and that the explosion effect does not occur during the B period of the second operation mode in the special role winning game. On top of that, the A period is the shortest, and the C period, D period, and B period are set to be longer in that order. It is possible to make people look forward to the occurrence of , and it is possible to suitably increase the attention of the explosion effect.

Furthermore, in relation to the pressing order bell winning game, eight medals are paid out when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination. , the waiting period is the B period. In this case, since it is set so as not to win the AT mode shift lottery when the press order bell wins (Fig. 30), there is no need to switch to the AT win notification side effect after the B period has passed, and it can be done in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity and an increase in processing load when trying to force a performance.

Further, when the bell is won in the pressing order, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an incorrect operation order that does not correspond to the winning of the 1st to the 6th minor winning combination, one medal is paid out or the medal is paid out. is not performed, the waiting period is 0 or A period. In other words, even during the period A when one medal is paid out, none of the small wins was established, or the 9th to 32nd minor wins were established instead of the 33rd minor win. If it is held, the stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the first operation mode so that the attention to the stop result can be increased and the 33rd minor winning combination is established. It is possible to prompt the user to operate.

<Regarding the number of omen games>
Next, the effect in the portent mode set based on the portent command will be described. The portent mode is a mode in which, in the event that an AT mode transition lottery or a CZ mode transition lottery is won, a portent effect suggesting that the transition lottery has been won can be executed in each game. In the game in which the number of predictive games is 0, notification of winning the AT mode transition or winning of the CZ mode transition is set to be performed.

As already explained, the number of precursory games is determined by the number of precursory games lottery processing when the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery processing and the stop AT lottery processing on the main control unit 101 side. It is determined in (step S817, step S1320). As described above, if the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 games.

Here, the number of precursor games in the normal mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

As described above, the number of precursor games is set to be selected from 0 games to 40 games. In this embodiment, the number of precursor games that are likely to be selected differs between the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process and the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the stop AT lottery process. is set to In addition, the number of precursor games that are likely to be selected is set to be different between when the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process and when the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the stop AT lottery process. It is Furthermore, the number of premonitory games that are likely to be selected differs between the case of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process at the start and the case of winning the CZ mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process at the start, and stop. The number of predictive games that are likely to be selected is set to be different between the case of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the time AT lottery process and the case of winning the CZ mode transition lottery in the stop AT lottery process. .

Specifically, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process at the start, either one of 1 game to 5 games or 15 games to 40 games is set as the number of predictive games, whereas the stop When the AT mode transition lottery is won in the time AT lottery process, any one of 1 game to 12 games is set as the number of predictive games. In addition, if the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process at the start, any one of 1 game to 32 games is set as the number of precursor games, whereas the CZ mode is set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop. If the transfer lottery is won, any one of 1 game to 7 games is set as the number of predictive games.

The case of winning the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery in the stop AT lottery process is only when the operation is performed in the first operation mode at the time of winning the special role, and the player has the opportunity to win the transition. There is a high possibility that you clearly understand the special role winning game that has become. On the other hand, in the case of winning the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process at the start, although the winning of a specific role is often triggered, chances A to C and cherry A to C is based on the results of replays, so there is no chance of losing a game, and the success or failure of the transfer lottery is not affected by whether or not there is a loss. There is also sex. Furthermore, regarding the CZ mode transition lottery, since it is possible to win the transition with normal reps A to C instead of the specific role, it is difficult to determine in which game the CZ mode transition has been won. Therefore, by facilitating the selection of a relatively long number of precursor games in the process for AT lottery at the time of start when there is a possibility that the player may not realize that a transfer win has been made, AT mode or CZ mode can be easily selected from any situation. It is possible to give the impression that the transition win can be given, and it is possible to provide a surprise when the notification of the transition win is made, and by doing so, the attention of each game in the normal mode It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the degree. Conversely, the number of predictive games determined in the stop AT lottery process triggered by the special winning combination is made easier to select a number of games that is shorter than the number of predictive games determined in the start AT lottery process. Thus, it is possible to shorten the period from grasping that the transfer lottery that is likely to be won is executed to reporting the result of success or failure, thereby preventing sluggishness in the game.

Comparing the case of winning the AT mode transition lottery and the case of winning the CZ mode transition lottery, both the AT lottery process at the start and the AT lottery process at the time of stop are set predictive games. It is set so that the number of predictive games is likely to be longer when the AT mode transition lottery is won. By doing so, the player who grasps that it is in the precursor mode from the precursor effect of each game or the like desires that the precursor mode continues as long as possible, and the player is encouraged to switch to the AT mode. It is possible to increase the percentage of games that attract more attention by using expectations.

In particular, the number of predictive games set when the AT mode transition wins in the start AT lottery process and the predictive game number set when the CZ mode transition wins in the start AT lottery process are different when the CZ mode transition wins. The number of precursor games up to 32 is selected, whereas the number of precursor games of 33 or more can be selected when the AT mode transition wins. By doing so, the player who has grasped that it is the omen mode will pay attention to each production in the omen mode while expecting that it will continue for 33 games or more, and will pay attention to each production. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is not won, the same or similar omen effect as during the omen mode is executed, and the AT mode transition lottery is finally won. A pseudo-prediction mode is set in which notification of the fact that it has been won and notification of the fact that the CZ mode transition winning has been won are not performed.

The number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is set to be selected from 1 game to 6 games and 10 games to 18 games. In this case, when the state in which the portent effect is performed continues for 19 games or more, the portent mode based on the AT mode transition winning or the CZ mode transition winning is determined. Therefore, the player who grasps that it is the omen mode or the pseudo omen mode from the omen production desires that the mode continues for 19 games or more, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to each game. be.

In the starting AT lottery process and the stopping AT lottery process in the main controller 101, the number of precursory games is determined based on the table of the number of precursory games set as described above, and the information of the number of precursory games is determined. to the display control device 81.

Hereinafter, the start-time precursor effect setting process, the stop-time precursor effect setting process, and the number-of-games management process, which are processes on the display control device 81 side, will be described.

<Omen effect setting process at start>
First, the start-time portent effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The start-time sign effect setting process is a process executed in step S2008 in the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 48).

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the normal mode. In the case of the CZ mode or the AT mode, or in the case of the normal section, the main start-time portent effect setting processing is terminated as it is. If it is normal mode, the process advances to step S2402.

In step S2402, it is determined whether or not the sub-side precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 183b are greater than zero. The sub-side omen counter is a counter to which a value corresponding to the number of omen games is input when the omen mode or pseudo omen mode is set, and which is decremented by one each time the game is completed. In other words, the process of step S2402 is the process of determining whether or not the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode is in progress.

If it is determined that the sub-side portent counter is 0 and the device is not in the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not a portent command has been received as the command at the start of this time. If no portent command has been received, a pseudo portent lottery process is executed in step S2404. The pseudo portent lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not to set the above-described pseudo portent mode. In the pseudo-prediction lottery process, a table for pseudo-prediction lottery is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to set the pseudo-prediction mode according to the lottery result of the current game. The pseudo sign lottery table in the present embodiment is set so that the less likely it is to appear as the lottery result of each game, the easier it is to win the pseudo sign lottery. is set to make it easier to win the pseudo omen lottery. In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is likely to be won and the transition lottery is not won, the pseudo portent mode is likely to occur.

After the pseudo sign lottery process is executed, it is determined whether or not the pseudo sign lottery is won in step S2405, and if not, the start time sign effect setting process is terminated. If the pseudo-prediction lottery is won, in step S2406, a process of setting a pseudo-prediction flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and in step S2407, a pseudo-prediction game count lottery process is executed. In the pseudo portent game count lottery process, the number of games table for the pseudo portent mode (FIG. 62) is obtained from the various table storage area 182a, and the number of portent games in the current pseudo portent mode is determined by lottery.

On the other hand, in step S2403, if the portent command is received in a situation other than the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode, the process advances to step S2408. In step S2408, it is determined whether or not the received portent command is triggered by winning the AT mode shift lottery. If the precursor command is triggered by winning the CZ mode transition lottery instead of the precursor command output by winning the AT mode transition lottery, then in step S2409 various flag storage areas 183a are stored. A process for setting the sub-side CZ mode winning flag is executed. On the other hand, if it is triggered by winning the AT mode transition lottery, in step S2410, a process of setting a sub-side AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. After executing the process of step S2409 or step S2410, in step S2411, the process of grasping information on the number of precursor games set in the received precursor command is executed.

After the pseudo precursor game number lottery process is executed in step S2407, or after the process of grasping the number of precursor games for the precursor mode is executed in step S2411, the above-mentioned sub-side precursor counter is set to a pseudo precursor in step S2412. A process of inputting a value corresponding to the number of portent games in mode or portent mode is executed. Through such processing, affirmative determination is made in step S2402 of the next game.

After executing the processing of step S2412, it is determined in step S2413 whether or not the number of games input in step S2412 is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games (8 games). If the number of games is 8 or less, in step S2414, the process of setting the first portent mode effect as the portent effect in the current portent mode or pseudo portent mode is executed, and then the main start portent effect setting process is terminated. In the first omen mode effect in this embodiment, a continuous effect is set that continues over a maximum of predetermined games (eight games). . The destination of the main character is determined according to the number of remaining precursor games, and whether or not an enemy character will be encountered in each game is notified. In a game in which the number of omen games is 0, in the omen mode, it is displayed that an enemy character is encountered and a battle is started, and in the pseudo omen mode, it is displayed that the search is given up without encountering the enemy character. is displayed.

If it is determined in step S2413 that the number of precursor games is greater than the predetermined number of games, it is determined in step S2415 whether or not the sub-side AT mode winning flag is set. If the sub-side AT mode winning flag is not set, and the CZ mode transition win is an omen mode or a pseudo omen mode, in step S2416, omen production in the current omen mode or pseudo omen mode After executing the processing for setting the second portent mode effect as , the main start portent effect setting processing is terminated. In the second omen mode effect in this embodiment, a continuous effect is set over at least the number of games greater than the predetermined number of games (eight games). A production for training is set. Then, the content of training for the main character is determined according to the remaining number of precursor games, and a state of performing the determined training is displayed, and whether or not a battle with an enemy character is started in each game is determined. is notified. In a game where the number of precursor games is 0, in the precursor mode, a battle with an enemy character is displayed, and in the pseudo precursor mode, the main character is injured during training and battles with the enemy character. A state of giving up is displayed.

If it is determined in step S2415 that the sub-side AT mode winning flag is set, and the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by the AT mode transition winning, and the number of portent games is greater than the predetermined number of games, The process advances to step S2417. In step S2417, a third predictor lottery process is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described first omen mode effect and second omen mode effect, a third omen mode effect that determines AT mode transition winning is determined when selected as the effect during the omen mode. Omen mode production is set. In the 3 omen mode effects in the present embodiment, a continuous effect is set over at least the number of games greater than the predetermined number of games (eight games). The production is set to display the state of devising a strategy in a narrow room. Then, depending on the number of remaining precursor games, the main character is displayed to have an idea of a strategy or to worry about it, and whether or not a battle with an enemy character will start in each game is announced. In a game in which the number of premonitory games is 0, a battle with an enemy character is started.

In step S2417, it is determined by lottery whether or not to set the above-mentioned third omen mode effect. In this embodiment, the winning probability of the third predictor lottery process is set differently according to the setting value set in the winning probability setting process in the main process of the main controller 101, and setting 6 is the highest. The probability of winning is high, and setting 1 has the lowest probability of winning.

After executing the third predictor lottery process in step S2417, it is determined whether or not the third predictor lottery process is won in step S2418. After executing the process of setting the mode effect, the present indication effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when winning in the third predictor lottery process, the process of setting the third predictor mode effect is executed in step S2719, and then the present start time predictive effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, each effect of the omen mode is set based on the reception of the omen command, and each effect of the pseudo omen mode is set by winning the pseudo omen lottery in a situation other than the omen mode. If it is determined in step S2402 that the sub-side omen counter is greater than 0, and the game is started in a situation where the omen mode or pseudo omen mode has already been set, the process proceeds to step S2420, and the pseudo omen flag is set. By determining whether or not it is set, it is possible to grasp whether the port mode is the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode.

If it is the pseudo portent mode, the process advances to step S2421 to determine whether or not a portent command has been received as a command at the start of the current game. If an omen command has been received and the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery is won during the pseudo omen mode, the pseudo omen flag is cleared in step S2422, and then the process proceeds to step S2408. In this case, a process (steps S2408 to S2419) is executed to change the content of the effect of the pseudo portent mode to the content of the effect of the portent mode.

If it is determined in step S2420 that the mode is the portent mode instead of the pseudo portent mode, or if the portent command is not received as the command at the start of the current game even in the pseudo portent mode in step S2421, step S2423 , and executes processing for subtracting 1 from the sub-side precursor counter. Then, in step S2424, after executing the processing for setting the portent effect corresponding to the value of the sub-side portent counter to be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64, the main start portent effect setting processing is terminated. do.

<Prediction effect setting processing at stop time>
Next, the stop-time portent effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The stop-time sign effect setting process is a process executed in step S2114 in the all-stop-time effect setting process (FIG. 49).

In step S2501, similarly to step S2401, it is determined whether or not the mode is the normal mode, and if the mode is the CZ mode or the AT mode, or if the mode is in the normal section, the premonitory effect setting process at stop ends. If it is in the normal mode, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the sub-side precursor counter is greater than 0, and whether or not it is already in the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is grasped. If the sub-side portent counter is 0, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not a portent command has been received as the current game stop command. If it has not been received, the present stop-time portent effect setting process is terminated as it is. That is, in the stop-time portent effect setting processing, processing for setting the pseudo portent mode is not provided. In this way, by entrusting the setting of the pseudo portent mode to the start portent effect setting processing, it is possible to eliminate duplication of processing and simplify the processing configuration.

If the portent command has been received, the process advances to step S2504. As already explained, the case where the portent command is output as the stop command is the case where the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won after being operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game. is. In this case, in step S2504, it is determined whether or not it is an omen command based on the AT mode transition winning, that is, when the special combination is won, the AT mode transition lottery among the processes related to the instruction function is won by operating in the first operation mode. It is determined whether or not it is the case. If the AT mode transition lottery is not won even though the operation is performed in the first operation mode, but the CZ mode transition lottery among the processing related to the instruction function is won, the sub-side CZ mode winning flag is set in step S2505. Execute. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, a process of setting the sub-side AT mode winning flag is executed in step S2506. After executing the process of step S2505 or step S2506, the process of grasping the number of precursor games is executed in step S2507.

After grasping the number of precursor games, in steps S2508 to S2515, similarly to the processing of steps S2512 to S2519, the number of precursor games is input to the sub-side precursor counter. If is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, a first omen mode effect is performed, and if it is greater than the predetermined number of games, a second omen mode effect or a third omen mode effect is performed, and then at the time of the main stop. The portent effect setting process is ended. In this embodiment, the winning probability of the third predictor lottery process in step S2513 and the winning probability of the third predictor lottery process in step S2417 are set to be different. , the lower the setting, the easier it is to win the third omen lottery, and in step S2417, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the third omen lottery. By doing so, in predicting the set value, it is grasped whether the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process at the time of start is won or the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process at the time of stop is won. As the need arises, it becomes possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the lottery results of each game. In addition, by doing so, it is possible to average the occurrence rate of the third precursor mode effect according to the set value when the start time and the stop time are combined.

If it is determined in step S2502 that the sub-side portent counter is greater than 0, it is determined in step S2516 whether or not the pseudo portent flag is set. If it is set, it is determined in step S2517 whether or not an omen command has been received as the current game stop command, and if it has been received, the pseudo omen flag is cleared in step S2518. Then, in steps S2504 to S2515, the process of rewriting from the pseudo precursor mode to the precursor mode is executed. If the pseudo precursor mode is not set in step S2516, or if the precursor command is not received in step S2517, the main stop precursor effect setting process is terminated.

<Number of games management process>
Next, the number-of-games management process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The number-of-games management process is a process that is executed in step S2115 in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 49). Execute processing to set the effect when reaching

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not it is the normal mode or the CZ mode, and if it is the AT mode or in the normal section, the stop-time portent effect setting process is terminated. If it is the normal mode or the CZ mode, in step S2602, a process of adding 1 to the sub-side game number counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The sub-side game number counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games from the transition to the advantageous section to the start of the AT mode. A counter that is cleared to 0 when In the subsequent step S2603, update processing of the game number display is executed. Specifically, the display of the number of games after transition to the advantageous interval displayed in a predetermined area of the auxiliary display section 65 (advantageous interval game number image AP, see FIG. 66) is set to the value of the sub-side game counter in step S2602. Execute processing to update the display accordingly.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the transition to the advantageous section, the number of ceiling games is set, and when the number of games played by a specific specified number reaches the ceiling game number, the AT mode transition lottery is performed. Instead, the AT mode winning flag is set (see FIG. 31, process for AT lottery at start). In this embodiment, the maximum number of games is set to 700, and the transition to the AT mode is confirmed by completing at least 700 games (FIG. 66(a)).

Also, in this embodiment, when the ceiling counter is subtracted according to the completion of each game, a subtraction value lottery process (step S1304) may be executed and then a number greater than 1 may be subtracted. I'm trying In this subtraction value lottery process, particularly, a large subtraction value is likely to be selected with a special role as a trigger (FIG. 39). However, even in the special winning game, if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the subtraction value lottery process is executed, but if the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the subtraction value lottery process is not executed. However, the ceiling counter is not decremented in the game.

In other words, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, as shown in FIG. is selected and subtracted from the ceiling counter, the ceiling counter may become 0 in fewer games than 700 games at t4 (t3). On the other hand, when the special role winning game is operated in the second operation mode, as shown in FIG. In the game, the ceiling counter is not decremented, so even if the actual number of games played reaches 700 at t4, the ceiling counter does not become 0. At t5, which is later than that, the ceiling counter does not become 0. become.

That is, when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, even if the display of the number of games after transition to the advantageous section (advantageous section game number image AP) reaches 700, which is the maximum ceiling number of games, the AT mode win flag is not set. There will be cases.

In the number-of-games management process, after executing the process of step S2603, in step S2604, it is determined whether or not a subtraction value command has been received as the current game stop command. If the subtraction value command has been received, in step S2605 the current subtraction value is grasped from the subtraction value command, and the absolute value of the subtraction value is added to the sub-side ceiling counter in the various counter areas 183b. do. Incidentally, as described above, when the subtraction value command is output from the main controller 101 in the special role winning game, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, and in the second operation mode. When operated by , the subtraction value command is not output.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the subtraction value command has not been received, or p after the processing of step S2605 has been executed, then in step S2606 the sub-side game number counter becomes a value corresponding to the ceiling game number. determine whether or not there is Specifically, when the ceiling game number is set to 700, when the sub-side game number counter updated in step S2602 reaches 700, an affirmative determination is made in step S2606. If the sub-side game number counter is different from the ceiling game number, the game number management process is terminated.

As described above, the sub-side game number counter is cleared to 0 when a shift to the AT mode occurs or when the advantageous section ends. The case of reaching means that although the game has been executed over the ceiling number of games, the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred. In this case, in step S2607, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT mode winning flag or the sub-side CZ mode winning flag is set. The case where any winning flag is set means that the ceiling counter on the side of the main control unit 101 is set to 0 and the portent mode is set, or after winning the CZ mode shift lottery. means. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2607, and the number-of-games management process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2607, and it is determined that the sub-side AT mode win flag or sub-side CZ mode win flag is not set even though the number of ceiling games has been consumed, step S2607 Proceeding to S2608, a process of calculating the difference between the number of ceiling games (700) and the sub-side ceiling counter is executed. That is, for example, when the special combination is won, the number of games for which the ceiling game number has not been subtracted is grasped by operating in the second operation mode (see FIG. 66(c)). As a result, it is possible to ascertain how many more games will be needed to reach the ceiling.

After executing the process of step S2608, the process of setting the pseudo precursor flag is executed in step S2609. Then, in step S2610, a process of inputting the actual number of remaining games until the ceiling is reached, ascertained in step S2608, to the sub-side precursor counter is executed. That is, in this case, the setting of the pseudo precursor mode is performed over the actual number of remaining games until the ceiling is reached.

Then, in step S2611, it is determined whether or not the number of actual remaining games until reaching the ceiling is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games (8 games). If the number of games is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, then in step S2612 a process of setting the precursor effect in the pseudo precursor mode as the first precursor mode effect is executed, and then the game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of actual remaining games until the ceiling is reached is greater than the predetermined number of games, the process of setting the current precursor effect in the pseudo precursor mode as the third precursor mode effect is executed, and then the actual number of games is executed. End management processing.

In this case, when the ceiling counter becomes 0 on the main controller 101 side, the AT mode winning flag is set and the portent command is output. Then, in the start-time portent effect setting processing, processing for rewriting the portent mode from the pseudo portent mode (steps S2420 to S2422, steps S2408 to S2419) is executed, and the number of portent games based on reaching the ceiling is exhausted. , a transition to the AT mode occurs.

Here, the number of ceiling games in this embodiment is set to 700 games, the probability of winning the special role is about 1/20, and the number of special role winning games is about 35 on average until the ceiling number of games is reached. will arrive. Then, if the special role winning game is always operated in the second operation mode, the subtraction of 35 times is not performed on average until 700 games are completed, and the actual number of times until reaching the ceiling game when 700 games are completed The average number of remaining games is 35 games.

As shown in FIG. 62, the number of premonitory games when reaching the ceiling is set so that a relatively short number of games from 1 game to 5 games can be easily selected. On the other hand, the number of premonitory games at the time of winning the AT mode shift set in the start AT lottery process is set so that up to 40 games can be selected.

That is, even if the second operation mode is operated every time in the special role winning game up to the ceiling number of games, the actual ceiling is reached after the 700th game is reached and the pseudo omen mode is started. , when the number of precursor games based on reaching the ceiling is set, the number of precursor games is likely to be within 40 games. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily carry out an omen effect including a pseudo omen mode until the actual ceiling is reached within the range of the omen effect based on the normal AT mode transition winning, giving the player a sense of incongruity. In addition, since the necessity of storing dedicated effect data is not so high, it is possible to reduce the amount of stored data.

In addition, in the pseudo omen mode when the number of ceiling games is reached, the third omen mode production that confirms that it is the omen mode that normally wins the AT mode transition lottery is set. It is also possible to relieve the player's disappointment that the AT mode is not started even though the ceiling number of games has been reached, by the effect that normally the AT mode is fixed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the first privilege is given and the processing related to the instruction function is executed as the first processing, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the first privilege is given rather than the first privilege. An advantageous second privilege is provided, and a special role is provided in which a process related to the instruction function is executed as a second process that is more disadvantageous than the first process, and a process related to the instruction function is executed in a game in which the special combination is won. The notification corresponding to the result of is executed during the game. More specifically, if a special role is won during the CZ mode, a notification corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the special role is executed at the end of the game in which the special role is won. bottom. By doing so, if the AT mode transition is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0, and the AT mode is started from the game next to the game in which the transition is won. Even if it is an announcement type game, it is possible to apply the special role, and even if you win the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the special role, when starting the AT mode from the next game, It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the AT mode transition win is not notified before the AT mode starts.

In addition, by doing so, even in the case of winning the AT mode transition triggered by the special role, the AT mode can be started speedily (with the precursor game as the shortest 0 game) in the same way as the other results. is possible, and it is possible to suitably apply to existing games a special role in which the processing related to the instruction function can only be performed at the end of the game.

When the player is operated in the first operation mode at the time of winning the special combination, the AT lottery process at the time of stop makes it possible to win the AT mode transition with a high probability, while when it is operated in the second operation mode is set so as not to win AT mode transition. In this way, by making the processing related to the instruction function executed according to the operation mode at the time of winning the special role to be extreme, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the special role winning game is made more careful. becomes possible.

If a special role is won during CZ mode, in the AT mode transition lottery when the game is operated in the first operation mode, it is set so that the AT mode transition will be won with a 50% probability. It is set so that about half of the chances of winning the AT mode transition during the CZ mode are special roles. In other words, in the case of AT mode transition winning triggered by a special role, if the AT mode transition winning is notified or the AT mode is started after several games even in CZ mode, AT About half of the transitions to the mode may result in a configuration that has undergone such an extended production. In this regard, by adopting the above-described configuration, it becomes possible to speedily perform from the AT mode transition lottery to the AT mode transition with respect to the AT mode transition triggered by a special combination that is relatively likely to occur, and the game can be further improved. It is possible to proceed favorably.

In the AT mode, when the push-order bell is won, the push-order notification effect is generated, which makes it possible to win the 1st to 6th small wins. It is executed based on the operation of the lever 41 . That is, when winning the push order bell in the first game of the AT mode, the push order notification effect is generated as the effect at the start of the first game. Because of such a configuration, even if it is a special role winning game, by notifying the AT mode transition winning in the game, in the configuration in which the AT mode is started from the next game, the pressing order notification effect can be achieved. It is possible to have a configuration in which AT mode transition winning is notified in advance before execution of .

During the CZ mode, the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery is notified by an effect such as whether or not the numbered character is doubled in each game. The tenpai effect is set as a highly expected effect, and the tenpai effect is before the end timing of the game and at the timing of branching between the first operation mode and the second operation mode when the special role is won. occurs after the first stop operation. By doing so, at the end of each game in the CZ mode, in notifying the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery, while having the effect of boosting it in advance, the first operation is performed depending on the presence or absence of the occurrence of the tenpai effect. It is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of deciding whether to operate in the mode or to operate in the second operation mode.

The AT mode transition lottery at the time of winning a special role is executed in the process for AT lottery at stop, but the process for AT lottery at stop is executed after the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed. . In other words, if the result of the AT mode shift lottery based on the special role is to be notified in the game, after the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed and before the betting operation for the next game is performed. It is necessary to perform the notification, and the execution timing of the notification is extremely limited. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention to the presentation of each game by using the Tenpai presentation or the like as described above to arouse the possibility of the double eye presentation in advance.

Although the above tenpai effect is likely to occur when the AT mode transition is won, it can also occur when the AT mode transition is not won. By doing so, even if the tenpai performance is executed in a situation where the AT mode shift lottery has not yet been executed in the special role winning game, there will be no contradiction when the subsequent AT mode shift lottery is not won. While doing so, it is possible to arouse a sense of anticipation for winning the AT mode transition when the tenpai effect occurs.

In this embodiment, the tenpai effect is set to occur not only in the special winning game, but also in the AT mode shift winning process at the start of the AT lottery process. By doing so, it is possible to increase the ratio of the Tenpai effect leading to the winning of the AT mode transition, and even when the AT mode transition lottery has not yet been executed in the special role winning game, when the Tenpai effect occurs. It is possible to arouse the expectations of

<Modification 1>
As described above, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the process related to the instruction function is executed as the first process, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the process related to the instruction function is performed as the second process. In the special combination executed as a process, in the present embodiment, the first process is set to execute the AT mode transition lottery, and the second process is set not to execute the AT mode transition lottery. Due to such a difference in processing, it is possible to start an effect corresponding to the execution of the first processing out of the first processing and the second processing without waiting for the result of the first processing. Therefore, in this modification, at the timing when it becomes possible to determine that the player has operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, an effect corresponding to the processing related to the instruction function when the operation is performed in the first operation mode is performed. to start.

Specifically, in the special role winning game as described above, the left reel 32L is first stopped, and the 9th "BAR" symbol is displayed from the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage. The first operation mode is the case where the stop operation is performed at the timing when reaches the middle stage. If a stop operation is performed at a timing outside the above range, the second operation mode is set (FIG. 24). In this case, it can be said that it is possible to determine whether or not the first operation mode is performed when the first stop ON operation is performed in the special winning game. Therefore, in the modified example, when the first stop ON operation is performed, notification for the AT mode transition lottery executed based on the first operation mode is started.

FIG. 67(a) is a flow chart showing the first stop ON effect setting process in this modified example. The first stop ON effect setting process is a process executed as one process of each stop operation effect setting process (step S1708) in the effect setting process (FIG. 47) of the display control device 81. This is a process executed when a command corresponding to the execution of is received from the main controller 101 .

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the game being executed is a special winning game. If it is a special combination winning game, it is determined whether or not it is the first operation mode in step S2702. That is, the first stop ON operation executed this time causes the left reel 32L to stop first, and from the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage, the 9th "BAR" symbol is displayed. It is determined whether or not the stop operation was performed at the timing of reaching the middle stage.

If it is the first operation mode, it is checked in step S2703 whether or not the sub-side CZ flag is set, thereby confirming whether or not the current game is a game in the CZ mode. If the game is in the CZ mode, it is determined in step S2704 whether or not the effect set for the current game is the loose eye effect. In the ten-pie effect lottery process (step S2223) executed at the start of the special role winning game, if the win is not won and the loose pattern effect is set instead of the ten-pie effect, the process proceeds to step S2705, and the set loose pattern is set. After executing the processing of changing the performance to the tenpai misplay performance, the present first stop ON time performance setting processing is terminated.

In this case, if the number character to be stopped in the middle variation area SP2 is made to be the same as the number character in the left variation area SP1 that is stopped this time, the loose eye effect is corrected to the tenpai off eye effect. good. Then, in the already set loose eye effect, when the left variation area SP1 and the right variation area SP3 are set so as to be characters with the same number, the number character to be stopped in the middle variation area SP2 is left variation. The number characters stopped in the area SP1 are corrected to be the same, and the number characters that were to be stopped in the right movement area SP3 are corrected to be different from the number characters stopped in the left movement area SP1. It is better to If a negative determination is made in steps S2701 to S2704, the present first stop ON effect setting process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), even if the loose eye effect is set in the special role winning game in the CZ mode, if the first stop ON operation corresponds to the first operation mode, As shown in FIG. 67(c1), the number character that stops in the middle fluctuation area SP2 based on the next second stop ON operation becomes the same as the number character that has already stopped in the left fluctuation area SP. At the time of the second stop ON operation, the ten-pie performance is performed. As a result, it is possible to arouse the expectation that the performance of double eyes will be executed in the current game and that the AT mode transition win will be announced, and the degree of attention of the player can be favorably increased. However, even in this case, at the time of the third stop ON operation, the ten-pie losing effect is executed instead of the double effect, and then the result of the AT mode shift lottery is notified through the bomb effect.

On the other hand, if the first stop ON operation corresponds to the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode, as shown in FIG. Since the number characters are not corrected, the loose stitches are executed as they are.

By doing so, even if the contents of the process related to the instruction function are different depending on the operation mode, the effect corresponding to the process related to the instruction function can be started before the stop operation is completed. It becomes possible.

In particular, even if it is done as described above, it is only necessary to correct the loose eye effect to the tempered misaligned eye effect. Even if there is, even though the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, double eyes effect will not occur. Therefore, it is possible to start the performance corresponding to the AT mode shift lottery in the stop AT lottery process before the transition lottery is executed within the range where no contradiction occurs in the performance.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the CZ mode, there is a case where notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the game is not performed. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the AT lottery process at the start in this modification.

In this modification, the process when it is determined that the AT mode transition lottery is won in the CZ mode in step S2809 is different from the process in the above embodiment, and other processes (steps S2801 to S2820). is the same as the corresponding processing (steps S801 to S820).

That is, if it is determined in step S2809 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won during the CZ mode (step S2808: YES, step S2809: YES), the CZ game counter is greater than the predetermined number (3) in step S2821. , determines whether or not the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is greater than a predetermined number. If more than the predetermined number remain, a delayed lottery process is executed in step S2822. The delayed lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the game should be suppressed when the AT mode transition lottery is won. For example, the winning probability of the delayed lottery may be changed according to the lottery result as a trigger for winning the AT mode shift, and it is easier to win the delayed lottery with the chance A than with the chance C. In addition, it may be possible to make it easier to win the delayed lottery when AT mode transition wins triggered by the lottery result with a high appearance rate of each game than when the lottery result with a low appearance rate is used as a trigger. Further, the delay lottery may be more likely to be won as the number of remaining games in the CZ mode increases.

After executing the delayed lottery process in step S2822, it is determined whether or not the delayed lottery is won in step S2823. If it is elected, after executing the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in step S2824, after executing the process of setting the delay flag in the various flag storage area 106d in step S2825, AT at the time of this start Lottery processing ends. On the other hand, if the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is less than or equal to the predetermined number in step S2821, or if it is determined that the delayed lottery was not won in step S2823, the process proceeds to step S2810 to terminate the CZ mode. , the processing for setting the omen mode of the 0 game, etc. are executed, and then the AT lottery processing at the start is terminated.

In other words, by winning the above-mentioned delayed lottery, although the AT mode winning flag is set, the CZ mode is not ended, the 0 game precursor mode is not set, and the corresponding precursor command is not output. On the side of the display control device 81, AT winning notification is not executed in the current game, and the effects in the CZ mode are continued to be executed.

However, as described above, even if the CZ mode is not terminated, since the AT mode winning flag is set, the next game lottery result handling process (FIG. 28) makes an affirmative determination in step S606. , the continuation determination process and the AT addition process are executed instead of the AT lottery process at the start. However, since the AT mode has not been started, only a negative determination is made in step S901 in the continuation determination process (FIG. 32).

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing in this modification.

Steps S2901 to S2910 are the same as the above steps S1001 to S1010. That is, even before the AT mode is started, since the AT mode shift lottery has already been won, an additional lottery for the AT mode set is performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by winning the delayed lottery.

If a negative determination is made in step S2905, or after the processing of step S2908 or step S2910 is executed, it is determined in step S2911 whether or not the delay flag is set. If the delay flag is not set, the AT addition process is terminated.

If the delay flag is set and the AT mode transition lottery is won in the CZ mode, but the precursor command has not yet been output, then in step S2912, the lottery result of this game is a special role winning. Determine whether or not If the special combination is won, the processing for setting the portent mode is executed in steps S2913 to S2916. That is, in step S2913, 0 is input to the portent counter, and in step S2913, the portent flag is set. Then, in step S2915, the AT mode shift lottery is won, and a portent command including information indicating that the number of portent games is 0 is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. After that, in step S2916, the processing for clearing the delay flag is executed, and then this AT addition processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2912 that the special combination is not won, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter is 1 in step S2917. A case where the CZ game counter is 1 is a case where the CZ game counter is set to 0 by the CZ game number processing when the game to be started this time ends, and the CZ mode ends. In this case, the process advances to step S2913 to execute a process of setting the precursor mode in which the number of precursor games is 0 games. If the CZ game counter is not 0 at step S2917, this AT addition processing is terminated as it is.

In other words, if you win the AT mode transition in the AT lottery process at the start of the CZ mode, by winning the delayed lottery, you will not be notified that you won the AT mode transition in this game. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(a1), for example, in the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won with the watermelon winning as a trigger, if the delayed lottery is won, the precursor command is not output in the current game. As shown in (a2), as an effect during the CZ mode of the current game, a ten-pie miss effect is executed instead of a parallel effect.

After that, if a special role is won before the current CZ mode ends (Fig. 70 (b1)), the double eyes effect is executed in the game and the AT mode transition lottery is announced ( FIG. 70(b2)). In this case, the double eyes effect is set in the CZ effect setting process at the start based on the portent command output at the start of the current game. Therefore, there are cases where the double effect is executed without the bomb effect (steps S2213 and S2214), and there are cases where the double effect is executed through the bomb effect (steps S2215, S2221, Steps S2303 to S2305). By doing so, in the special role winning game, not only when the notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery is performed after the final stop, but also when the notification of the winning is performed before that. As a result, it becomes possible to draw the player's attention to the performance before the final stop in the special role winning game.

In addition, when the fact that the AT mode shift lottery is won is notified in the special role winning game via the fact that the delayed lottery has been won, in the special role winning game, as shown in FIG. 70 (b1), Regardless of whether the operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the notification of the winning will be performed. By doing so, even if the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the first operation mode, but the AT mode transition lottery is not executed in the second operation mode, it is as if the AT mode transition lottery is in the second operation mode. It is also possible to give an impression as if a mode transition lottery is being performed, and for example, even a player who has mistakenly operated in the second operation mode can be made to watch the notification with hope. Therefore, even a player who does not understand that the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the second operation mode can fully enjoy the special role winning game.

Furthermore, as in the above configuration, in the special role winning game, the fact that the AT mode transition lottery has been won can be notified even in the second operation mode, so that the first minor role winning is possible in the second operation mode. ~If the 6th minor role is won, it will be possible to give the impression that you have won the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the pushing order bell, and it will also increase the attention when winning the pushing order bell. It is possible. In this case, although the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning occurs in the special role winning game, the 9th minor role winning to the 32nd minor role winning does not occur. It is possible to give the impression that if the order of operations matches the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination, the AT mode shift lottery will be won. By doing so, even before shifting to the AT mode, it is possible to make the player more interested in the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell. is possible.

In order to enhance this effect, when the delay flag is set at the time of winning the special role, along with the CZ mode effect this time, as shown in FIG. The auxiliary display unit 65 or the like may be configured to perform an effect that the player expects. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays three question mark characters corresponding to the three stop switches 42 to 44 . Each time the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, a question mark corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 to 44 is replaced with a mark indicating the correct answer (for example, a circular character). In this case, the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 of the three question marks should be operated first in order to establish the 1st minor winning prize to the 6th minor winning prize when the special role is won. It is recommended that a notification to that effect be made at the same time. By doing so, it is precisely because the 1st to 6th minor role wins have been successfully established that the AT mode transition lottery is won and the parallel eyes effect (FIG. 70(b2)) is executed. It is possible to give a stronger impression.

Further, in the pressing order bell winning game, a pressing order prediction effect may be executed to make the player predict the above operation order. However, in the press order bell winning game, in the present embodiment, even in the CZ mode, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not won (Fig. 30), so the order of operations is the first to sixth minor winning prizes. Even if they match, the double eyes production will not occur.

In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(d), in the pressing order bell winning game, the above-described expected pressing order effect is generated, and the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the first minor winning combination to the sixth minor winning combination. When the operation order corresponds to winning, a correct answer effect is performed in the pressing order prediction effect to the effect that the pressing order was correct, and the operation order does not correspond to the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination. In this case, an incorrect answer rendering is performed to the effect that the pushing order was incorrect in the pressing order prediction rendering. Then, even if the correct answer effect occurs in the pressing order bell winning game, the AT mode winning is not achieved. It is possible to give the impression that the AT mode transition lottery is won by a part of correct operation sequences of winning the 1st to 6th minor winnings when the bell is won.

In the special role winning game, the middle and right Hatena characters corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 and the right stop switch 44 may be displayed as "1" or the like in the pushing order prediction effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the user from being operated in the first operation mode and encourage the user to operate in the second operation mode.

It should be noted that the CZ mode transition lottery may also be won in the pressing order bell winning game. By doing so, in combination with the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning at the time of the special role, when the pushing order bell is won, the AT mode transition lottery can be won, but the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning It is possible to give the impression that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery if you correctly answer the operation order of the small winning prize than if you do not answer correctly. It is also possible to give the impression that it is a kind of Therefore, it is possible to make a great use in improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the pressing order bell is won in a situation where the delay flag is set, the pressing order prediction effect is performed, and when the operation order of the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning is correct, the correct answer effect is performed. At the same time, a configuration may be adopted in which double eyes effect is generated to inform AT mode transition winning. In this case, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the correct answer effect and double eyes effect are generated as described above when the pressing order bell is won in a situation where the delay flag is set (when the predetermined lottery is won). .

<Modification 3>
In this modification, by utilizing the fact that the stop roll when operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game is partly common to the stop roll in other lottery results, the AT mode transition lottery is won. The notification to the effect that the operation has been completed is executed before the operation is completed.

FIG. 71(a) is a flow chart showing the first stop ON effect setting process in this modified example.

In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is cherry A-C. In the following step S3002, it is determined whether or not the "BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L by grasping the stop number stopped based on the first stop ON operation this time. As described above, when cherries A to C are won, the 10th re-game winning flag and the 12th re-game winning flag are set (see FIG. 20 etc.), and the 10th re-game symbol and 12th re-game symbol on the left reel 32L are set. The game pattern is a "BAR" pattern (see FIG. 10). On the other hand, in a game in which cherries A to C are won, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the "BAR" symbol cannot be stopped on the left reel 32L, the second stop switch 42 is placed in the middle stage of the left reel 32L. 11. Any one of the "red 7" symbol, the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol, which are the replay symbols, stops.

In step S3002, the first stop ON operation corresponds to the left reel 32L, and the stop result corresponds to the 10th regame win or the 12th regame win, and the 11th replay. It is determined that it does not correspond to winning a prize. If the determination in step S3002 is affirmative, it is determined in step S3003 whether or not the sub-side CZ flag has been set and the game being started this time is in the CZ mode. If it is in the CZ mode, it is determined in step S3004 whether or not a precursor command has been received as a command at the start of the current game. The case where the premonition command is received means that the lottery for shifting to AT mode has been won with this cherry A to C as a trigger.

When the portent command is received, in step S3005, based on the first stop ON operation, control is performed so that the confirmation effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, and then when the main stop ON End the effect setting process. The fixed effect is a effect to notify that you have won the AT mode transition lottery, and in this modification, as shown in FIG. The character is stopped, and an image corresponding to the fixed effect is displayed in the medium variation area SP2 and the right variation area SP3 which are in the process of being changed. In addition, in the background of the image (middle variation area SP2 and right variation area SP3) corresponding to the fixed effect, characters with the same numbers as the characters stopped in the left variation area SP1 are displayed in these middle variation area SP2 and right variation area SP3. A stop notice image (an image that faintly displays numerical characters) is displayed to give notice of stopping in the variable area SP3. By doing so, when the first reel is stopped, the AT mode transition lottery is won before the second and third reels are stopped (AT winning effect is performed in this game ) can be grasped by the player.

If a negative determination is made in any one of steps S3001 to S3004, the present first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 71(c1), the case where the "BAR" symbol stops in the middle stage of the left reel 32L means the case where the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are stopped and the tenth replay winning is established (FIG. 71 (c2)), the 12th re-game winning (FIG. 71(c3)), and the 33rd minor combination winning (FIG. 71(c4)).

In other words, the case where the "BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L includes the stop result when the player is operated in the first operation mode when the special combination is won. Therefore, in the case of winning the AT mode transition lottery based on Cherry A to C, by generating a fixed effect when the "BAR" pattern stops in the middle stage, the AT after stopping is executed based on the winning of the special role. It is also possible to give the player the impression that the result of the mode transition lottery is notified in advance. By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the effect at the time of the stop operation.

By applying the above modification 3 to modification 2, the special role is won under the condition that the delay flag is set, and the "BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle row of the left reel 32L based on the first stop ON operation. It is also possible to generate the above-mentioned fixed effect at the time of the execution. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the fixed effect when the "BAR" stops in the middle stage of the left reel 32L. Then, even if it becomes possible to distinguish whether it is a special role or Cherry A to C by the subsequent stop operation, the fixed effect is not only triggered by Cherry A to C but also by a special role. Since it is possible to give an impression that a special combination will also occur, it is possible to easily remind the player of winning a special role at the time when the fixed effect occurs. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention when a special role is won.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process for stoppage is specified prior to the execution timing of the AT lottery process for stoppage, and the effect of the game is determined based on the specified result.

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing part of the AT lottery process at the start in this modification. As already explained, the AT lottery process at the start is a process executed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and although it is possible to determine whether or not a special role is won, in the game in the first operation mode It cannot be determined whether it is operated or operated in the second operation mode.

After determining that the ceiling counter is not 0 in step S801 in the AT lottery process at the start, the process of acquiring the AT lottery random number is executed in step S3101. Then, in step S3102, a process of grasping the lottery result of the game is executed. The processes of steps S3101 and S3102 are the same as the processes of steps S802 and S803 described above.

In subsequent step S3103, based on the processing result of step S3102, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a special role winning. In the case of winning a special combination, a preliminary determination process is executed in step S3104. If it is determined in step S3103 that the special role is not won, or if the pre-determination process is performed in step S3104, the process proceeds to step S804 to perform an AT mode shift lottery at the start.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the pre-determining process in step S3104. The advance determination process is a process for specifying the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process for stoppage prior to the execution timing of the AT lottery process for stoppage.

That is, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step S3202, a process of acquiring a normal AT mode transition lottery table for stopping is executed. Execute the process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table. These lottery tables are as shown in FIG.

After acquiring one of the lottery tables, in step S3204, the AT mode transition lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game this time is selected from the above lottery table. , and the AT lottery random number obtained in step S3101. In other words, even in the stop AT lottery process (FIG. 38), the AT mode transition lottery is executed using the same lottery table and the AT lottery random number obtained based on the start operation. The AT mode transition lottery executed in S3204 and the AT mode transition lottery (step S1310) executed in the stop AT lottery process have the same result, and in the normal mode, the AT mode transition lottery is won with a probability of 10%. If it is CZ mode, AT mode transition wins with a probability of 50%.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in step S3205, the AT mode shift lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode in the special role winning game this time is set to the lottery table and step S3101. It is executed from the AT lottery random number obtained by In the stopping AT lottery process (FIG. 38) in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is not executed when operated in the second operation mode. If the configuration is such that an AT mode transition lottery is also executed in this case, in the stop AT lottery process, a similar lottery table and an AT lottery random number obtained based on the start operation are used to perform the AT mode transition. Since a lottery is executed, the AT mode transition lottery executed in step S3205 and the AT mode transition lottery (step S1310) executed in the stop AT lottery process have the same result. In the present embodiment, the AT mode transition is won with a probability of 0% in the normal mode, and the AT mode transition is won with a probability of 0% in the CZ mode. Do not win the migration lottery.

After executing the processing of steps S3204 and S3205, in step S3206, it is determined whether or not the processing result of step S3204 is AT mode transition winning. , a process of setting the first operation winning notice command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first operation winning notice command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the player is operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game this time.

If a negative determination is made in step S3206 or after the processing of step S3207 is executed, it is determined in step S3208 whether or not the processing result of step S3205 was AT mode transition winning. 2, in step S3209, a process of setting the second operation winning notice command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second operation winning notice command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the AT mode shift lottery will be won if the player is operated in the second operation mode in the special role winning game this time. If a negative determination is made in step S3208, or if the process of step S3209 has been executed, this preliminary determination process ends.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the starting CZ effect setting process in this modified example.

In the starting CZ effect setting process in this modified example, the process when winning a special combination (step S3305: YES) is different, and the other processes (steps S3301 to S3321) are the same as those of steps S2201 to S2221. is.

Specifically, in a game in which a special role is won during the CZ mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, and the process proceeds to step S3322. In step S3322, processing for setting a special combination flag is executed. Then, in step S3323, it is determined whether or not the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command has been received. If any of these winning notice commands have been received, the process advances to step S3304 to set the effect so that the tenpai effect is executed.

In other words, when it is specified in advance that the AT mode transition lottery will be won by operating in any of the operation modes by the advance determination process, in the start CZ effect setting process, notification to the effect that the AT mode transition lottery is won is performed. A tenpai effect with a high expectation of being beaten will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to start an effect corresponding to the result of the stop AT lottery process without waiting for the result of the stop AT lottery process.

However, as described above, when the special role is won, the precursor command is not output for the AT lottery at the start, so a negative determination is made in step S3310, and the setting is made so that the tenpai losing effect is performed. be. In addition, when the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is not received, even if the lottery is won through the tenpai effect lottery process for the special role in step S3324, the tenpai in step S3304 It is set so that an effect is performed, and thereafter, it is set so that a tenpai misplacement effect is performed.

That is, when the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received, the tenpai effect is executed without going through the tenpay effect lottery process, and as a result, these winning notice commands are executed. When the tenpai performance is executed, including the case of not receiving the tenpai performance, the ratio leading to the notification of winning the AT mode shift is increased, and the expectation for the tenpai performance can be suitably increased.

In particular, in this modification, whether or not the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received can be predicted from the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ten pie effect, and the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ten pie effect It is determined by the second stop ON operation. That is, the case where the ten-pie effect occurs is the timing after it has already been determined which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode will be performed. By adopting such a configuration, the act of changing the operation mode by the effect that occurs when the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received is suppressed, and the game that knows the occurring effect. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of events in which only one person has an advantage. Therefore, the fairness of the game is ensured.

That is, for example, when the first operation winning notice command is received, a special effect (for example, the effect sound when operating the lever is different from the normal time) at the timing before the first stop ON operation When a special effect sound effect) is generated, it is possible to know in advance that the AT mode transition will be won by operating in the first operation mode, so that the interest of the game is improved. It is preferable to increase However, with such a configuration, in a game in which the above-mentioned special effect does not occur, even if the player is operated in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition win will not be won. It is preferable for the player to receive more medals paid out. Therefore, the occurrence of a special effect corresponding to the result of the pre-determination process before the operation is preferable in terms of improving the interest of the game, but it is not preferable in terms of ensuring the fairness of the game. In this modified example, as described above, after the branch between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the notification corresponding to the result of the preliminary determination process is performed. It is possible to expect the above effect by

Incidentally, in the case of performing a special effect corresponding to the result of the preliminary determination process before the operation as described above, it is not a structure that the special effect is always generated when the first operation winning notice command is received. Even if a special effect may not occur when the first operation winning notice command is received, it may be better to operate in the second operation mode even if the special effect does not occur. It is no longer definitive. That is, in performing the effect corresponding to the result of the preliminary determination process, even if it is operated in the first operation mode from the effect, it is not confirmed that the AT mode transition lottery is not won. It is possible to motivate the player to operate in the first operation mode irrespective of the result of the determination process, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Incidentally, when the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received, a special effect different from the tenpai effect may be executed. As the special effect, for example, the fixed effect shown in FIG. 71(b) may be applied. In addition, it is preferable to use a special sound effect that does not or is unlikely to occur during the tenpai presentation, or to make a character that does not or is unlikely to appear normally appear. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the operation mode when winning a special combination, and in particular, it is set so that the AT mode transition win is not won in the second operation mode as in the above embodiment. In the configuration, it is assumed that it is operated in the first operation mode, and by executing the above special effect, it is possible to grasp in advance that the AT mode transition will be won. It is possible to realize such novel game characteristics.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, game characteristics using the above pre-determination process will be described. Specifically, in this modification, when it is specified that the AT mode shift lottery is won by operating in the first operation mode when the special role is won in the preliminary determination process, the first operation wins as described above. In addition to outputting a notice command, if the first operation winning notice command is not received at the time of winning the special role, the operation is performed in the second operation mode, and the first to sixth minor wins are performed. A specific notification performance is executed to establish a winning combination. Note that the mode in which the specific notification effect is executed will be referred to as navigation mode in the following description.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing navigation mode processing in this modified example. The navigation mode process is a process executed as one of the other processes (step S2012) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) on the display control device 81 side.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not a transition to an advantageous section has occurred in the game to be started this time. If a transition to an advantageous section occurs, in step S3402, a navigation mode lottery is executed to determine whether or not to transition to the navigation mode. In this modification, the winning probability of the navigation mode lottery is set differently according to the set value set in the winning probability setting process. It is set to make it easier to win the mode lottery.

After executing the navigation mode lottery in step S3402, it is determined whether or not the navigation mode lottery is won in step S3403. If the navigation mode lottery is won, a process of setting a navigation mode flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step S3404.

If a negative determination is made in step S3401 or step S3403, or after the processing of step S3404 is executed, it is determined in step S3405 whether or not the game to be started this time will shift to the AT mode. If the game to be started this time is the AT mode transition game, the process for clearing the navigation mode flag is executed in step S3406, and then the navigation mode process is terminated. If it is determined in step S3405 that the AT mode transition game is not being played, the navigation mode processing is terminated.

That is, in this modification, if the navigation mode lottery executed at the time of transition to the advantageous section is won, the navigation mode is set, and the navigation mode is terminated by shifting to the AT mode. In addition, in this modification, since the navigation mode is not terminated at the end of the advantageous section, even if the advantageous section ends without shifting to the AT mode, the navigation mode remains It is possible to continue to enjoy the benefits of the navigation mode until the shift to the AT mode occurs.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing specific notification processing in this modified example. The specific notification process is also a process executed as one of the other processes (step S2012) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) on the display control device 81 side.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating a special role has been received as the command at the start of this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501 and the lottery result of this game is a special combination, the process proceeds to step S3502. In step S3502, it is determined whether or not the first operation winning notice command has been received.

When the first operation winning notice command is received, as described above, it is a special role winning game, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery is won. It is specified in advance that If the first operation winning notice command is not received, that is, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode at the time of winning the special role, the above in step S3503 determines whether or not the navigation mode flag of is set. If the navigation mode flag is set, in step S3504, after executing the processing for setting the specific notification effect to be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 as the effect at the start of the current game, This specific notification process ends. That is, the specific notification effect is executed as a starting effect, and is a effect executed before the stop switches 42-44 are operated.

When the first operation winning notice command is received in step S3502, or when the navigation mode flag is not set in step S3503, the specific notification processing is terminated as it is without setting the specific notification effect. do.

If it is determined that it is not a special role winning game in step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3505, a lottery result command indicating a special role is received, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a special role winning. do.

Here, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 77(c), a 13th replay is added as a prize mode, and the left reel 32L has a "replay" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "replay" symbol, and the right reel 32M has a "replay" symbol. It is set so that the 13th replay winning prize is established when the "Bell" symbol on the reel 32R stops on the active line. The above special role is a role that enables the 13th replay prize, and has a lower probability than other AT winning opportunities such as special roles in 3-bet games (specifically, about 1/5000) probability) to win. In addition, in the normal AT mode transition lottery table at the start and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at the start in the AT lottery process at the start in this modification, the AT mode transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% in the above special combination. is set to

In step S3505, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current game is the winning of the special role, in step S3506, it is determined whether or not a portent command has been received as a command at the start of this time. The case where the precursor command is received means that the AT mode shift lottery based on the special role is won, and means that the special role is won during the normal mode or CZ mode instead of the AT mode. If the portent command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3504 to execute the processing for performing the specific notification effect, and then the specific notification processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3505 or step S3506, the specific notification process is terminated.

In the specific notification effect in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays three characters of "Red 7" in a row and displays the characters "Aim". , a sound such as "Aim" is output from the speaker 64, and an effect is set to notify that the situation is to aim for the "Red 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

Here, when the 13th regame win is established, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated aiming at the "red 7" symbol, a "red 7" symbol appears on the lower line L3 as shown in FIG. can stop together. On the other hand, the operation mode aiming at the "red 7" symbol in the special role winning game is not included in the range of the first operation mode (Fig. 24), and it is the case where the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L. However, the 33rd minor winning combination is not established, and the 1st minor winning combination is established.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 77(b2), the stop numbers of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in the case of establishing the first small winning combination aiming at the "red 7" symbol are the same as the 13th replay winning. When the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, it is possible to determine whether the 1st small win is established or the 13th replay win is established. Can not.

In other words, in the case where the specific notification effect is executed to notify that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol, the player does not win the AT mode shift lottery in the special role winning game, so the second operation mode. It is not possible to determine whether the operation is prompted or whether the 13th re-game winning, which is the AT mode transition lottery, is won. By doing so, in the game property aiming at winning the AT mode transition, when the specific notification performance is executed, the AT mode transition non-winning at the time of winning the special role is not decided, and the specific notification performance is performed. and based on it, the enjoyment of operating the stop switches 42-44 can be enhanced.

Benefits of the navigation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 77(d).

In the situation where the navigation mode is not set, the specific notification effect does not occur in the special role winning game, so the stop switches 42 to 44 should be operated in the first operation mode in order to receive the AT mode transition lottery. Yes, in this case, as described above, the 33rd minor winning combination is established. In this way, when the game is always played in the first operation mode, a decrease of about 1.37 medals per game can be expected, and about 36.40 games can be completed per 50 medals. On the other hand, if the special role winning game is always operated in the second operation mode, a reduction of about 1.02 medals per game can be expected, and about 48.84 games can be completed per 50 medals. The number of games that can be completed with the same number of games is greater when the operation is performed in the second operation mode than when the operation is performed in the first operation mode. However, as described above, by using the second operation mode, it becomes impossible to receive the AT mode transition lottery, and the ceiling counter is not decremented. , it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode than to operate in the second operation mode.

Approximately half of the cases where the game is operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game will win the AT mode transition, and in the navigation mode, when the AT mode transition wins, the specific notification effect will always occur. Half of them are operated in the first operation mode, and half are operated in the second operation mode. In this case, a reduction of about 1.20 medals per game can be expected, and about 41.71 games can be played per 50 medals. Therefore, although the number of games that can be completed with the same number of sheets is smaller than when the operation is always performed in the second operation mode, the number of games that can be completed with the same number of sheets is greater than when the operation is performed in the first operation mode. , it becomes possible to efficiently receive the AT mode transition lottery. That is, in terms of game characteristics aiming at the AT mode shift lottery, the game in the navigation mode is more advantageous than the case where the game is always operated in the first operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the game in the configuration using the special combination.

Here, as described above, in the at-stop AT mode transition lottery, at least when a special role is won, the AT mode transition lottery is set to be performed with a common probability regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the winning probability of the navigation mode lottery is set to be higher, the easier it is to win. By doing so, it is possible to vary the number of games (base) per unit number of medals according to the set value without providing a setting difference for the transition rate to the AT mode.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, a special role winning game in the AT mode will be described.

In the above-described embodiment, among the processes related to the instruction function triggered by the special combination, the additional lottery in the AT mode is the same when operated in the first operation mode and in the second operation mode. More specifically, even in the case of a special role winning game, an additional lottery is executed in the AT addition process executed at the start in the same manner as other lottery results. In this modified example, this is changed, and the details of the process for the additional lottery in the AT mode are also made different between when the operation is performed in the first operation mode and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode.

FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing part of the AT game number processing in this modification. As described above, the process for the number of AT games is a process executed in step S1211 of the winning result handling process (step S415) executed after the payout determination process in the reel control process (FIG. 22).

In this modification, first, in step S3601, a stop AT addition process is executed. After that, in step S1601, subtraction processing of the AT game number counter is executed to manage the number of games in the AT mode.

FIG. 78(b) is a flow chart showing the stop AT addition processing in step S3601.

The stop AT addition process is basically the same process as the AT addition process (FIG. 33) that is executed at the time of start. is not performed, the process of grasping the operation mode of the current game is performed, and the additional lottery table used in the additional lottery is different. That is, in this modification, the operation mode of the current game is grasped in step S3611, and the subsequent processing of steps S3612 to S3620 is the same as the processing of steps S1002 to S1010, and the operation mode is obtained in step S3613. The additional lottery table obtained in step S1003 is different from the additional lottery table obtained in step S1003.

Regarding the additional lottery table, specifically, in the AT additional lottery process executed at the start in this modification (hereinafter referred to as the AT additional lottery process at the start to distinguish it from the one at the time of stop), FIG. , it is set so that the extra lottery based on the special role is not won. On the other hand, in the addition lottery table acquired in step S3613 in the above-described stop AT addition processing, if the special role winning game is operated in the first operation mode, the addition lottery is won with a probability of 30%. However, it is set so that the additional lottery is not won when the operation is performed in the second operation mode.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing part of the process for adding AT at the start in this modification. This process is a modified example of the scrivener for adding AT in step S609 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 28).

The processing of steps S3701 and S3702 is the same as the processing of steps S1001 and S1002 described above, and acquires an additional lottery random number to grasp the lottery result of the current game. In the following step S3703, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a special combination winning, and if the special combination is winning, a pre-addition determination process is executed in a step S3704. If it is determined in step S3703 that the special combination is not won, or after executing the process of step S3704, the process proceeds to step S1004 to execute the extra lottery process at the start. As described above, in the special role winning game, it is set so as not to win in the extra lottery process at the start. In addition, in the special role winning game, the additional lottery at the start may not be performed.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the pre-addition determination process in step S3704.

In step S3801, a process of acquiring an AT addition lottery table at the time of stop is executed. The lottery table acquired in step S3801 is the same lottery table as the lottery table acquired in step S3613. In the following step S3802, the AT addition lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game this time is determined from the lottery table and the addition lottery random number obtained in step S3701. Execute. In other words, even in the stop AT additional lottery process (FIG. 78(b)), the same lottery table and the additional lottery random number obtained based on the start operation are used to execute the AT additional lottery. Therefore, the AT add-on lottery executed in step S3802 and the AT add-on lottery (step S3614) executed in the process for the stop AT add-on lottery have the same result, and an add-on lottery is won with a probability of 30%.

After executing the process of step S3802, in step S3803, the AT addition lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode in the special role winning game of this time, the above lottery table and step It is executed from the additional lottery random number acquired in S3701. In this case as well, the result is the same as the result of the AT addition lottery in the stop AT addition lottery process (FIG. 78(b)), and the AT addition lottery executed in step S3803 does not result in winning. In the case of a configuration in which an additional lottery is not performed when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the configuration in which an additional lottery is not performed in the case of the operation in the second operation mode also in the addition preliminary determination process. may be

After executing the process of specifying in advance the result of the additional lottery at the time of stop at step S3802 or step S3803 at the time of start, at step S3804, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode It is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won, and if the additional lottery is won, the process of setting the first operation winning notice command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S3805. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S3804, or after the processing of step S3805 is executed, in step S3806, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won. If the player wins the additional lottery, a process of setting the second operation winning notice command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S3807. If a negative determination is made in step S3806, or if the process of step S3807 has been executed, the pre-addition determination process ends.

FIG. 82(a) is a flow chart showing a part of the effect setting process at the start in this modified example. As described above, the start effect setting process is a process executed when the display control device 81 receives a start command at the start of the game.

Steps S3901 to S3903 are the same as the processing of steps S2001 to S2003, and when the lottery result command for the pressing order bell group is received, the first to sixth minor winning prizes When any one of the pressing order notification commands is received, the setting is made so that the pressing order notification effect of the corresponding operation order is performed.

If it is determined in step S3901 that the lottery result command for the pressing order bell group has not been received, it is determined in step S3904 whether or not the lottery result command for the special combination has been received. If the lottery result command for the special role has been received, it is determined in step S3905 whether or not the pressing order notification command has been received. As described above, when the pressing order notification command is output in the special role winning game, it means that the AT mode is in progress. In addition, as described above, the pressing order notification command at the time of winning the special combination is the pressing order notification command indicating the operation order for winning the sixth minor combination.

In the case of winning a special role in AT mode, the process proceeds to step S3906, and it is determined whether or not the first operation winning notice command has been received. If the first operation winning notice command has not been received, that is, if the addition lottery is not won even if it is operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game this time, the process proceeds to step S3903, and the sixth minor role It is set so that the pressing order notification performance of the operation order corresponding to the prize winning is performed. In this case, based on the winning of the special role, instead of the 33rd minor winning combination in which one medal is paid out, it is possible to establish the 6th minor winning combination in which eight medals are paid out. In other words, in the extra lottery based on the special role this time, if the first operation mode does not result in a win, the second operation mode with a large number of medals to be paid out is used. It is possible to improve the medal increase speed (the number of net increases).

On the other hand, even if the special role winning in the AT mode, in step S3906, it is determined that the first operation winning notice command has been received, the first operation mode in the special role winning game this time If an additional win is obtained by operating , in step S3907, it is determined whether or not it is confirmed that the number of AT mode games and the number of increased medals will reach the upper limit of the advantageous section. As already explained, in the remaining game number management process (step S1804) in the section display second process (FIG. 46) on the main controller 101 side, the total number of games completed in the advantageous section and the number of remaining AT mode games is calculated. , If the situation is such that the number of games is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, and it is already confirmed that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section will be reached by digesting the remaining AT mode, the first excess command is output. do. In addition, in the remaining number management processing (step S1805) in the section display second processing, based on the number of remaining AT mode games, etc., the number of remaining games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400). If the remaining AT mode will reach the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section, a second exceeding command is output. In the above step S3907, by grasping whether or not the first excess command and the second excess command are received, it is possible to determine whether or not the situation is likely to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section. be.

When it is determined in step S3907 that the situation does not reach the upper limit, in step S3908, setting is made so that the specific notification effect during AT is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. FIG. On the other hand, in step S3907, when it is determined that the situation reaches the upper limit, that is, in the special role winning game of this time, if it is operated in the first operation mode, it is a situation in which additional winning is possible. However, even if AT mode addition processing is performed based on the additional winning, if it is a situation where it is meaningless in terms of the number of games and the number of medals to be increased, the process proceeds to step S3903 to deal with the sixth minor winning combination. It is set so that the pressing order notification effect of the operation order to be performed is performed. In this case, in the special role winning game, it is possible to establish the 6th minor role winning with a large number of medals to be paid out.

That is, in this modification, in the special role winning game in the AT mode, even if it is possible to win additional winnings by operating in the first operation mode, the relationship between the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section and the upper limit increase number If the situation is such that the number of games in the remaining AT mode that has already been determined reaches the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of games in the advantageous section, no more AT mode Assuming that there is no need to perform the additional processing, the operation is performed in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode, and the sixth minor winning combination with a large number of medals to be paid out is established. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the emptiness of further winning in a situation where it is certain that the upper limit will be reached, and that the upper limit will not be reached. is determined, the upper limit increase number can be reached early, or the total number of medals to be paid out when the upper limit number of games is reached can be increased.

As the specific notification effect during AT in step S3908, in this modification, as shown in FIG. An effect is set such that three symbols are displayed in the portion 65, and an effect similar to the above-described special role notification effect is set.

In this embodiment, when Cherry A to C are won among the specific combinations, the 10th re-game winning to the 12th re-game winning can be established, and among these, the 12th re-game winning is established. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the 12th re-game winning is established, it is confirmed that the cherry B or cherry C was won, and the 12th re-game winning is confirmed. If the 10th re-game win is established in spite of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 at a timing that can be established, it is determined that it was Cherry A. On the other hand, if the 11th regame win is established, it cannot be determined which of the cherries A to C was won.

Then, if the type of cherries A to C is to be discriminated in the event of occurrence of the specific role notification effect, at least the 10th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning is established instead of the 11th re-game winning. It can be said that it is necessary to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 with timing. The 10th and 12th replay symbols on the left reel 32L are "BAR" symbols, and the 11th replay symbols are "Red 7", "Ark shell" and "White shell" symbols. The timing at which the 10th regame winning prize or the 12th regame winning prize can be established on the reel 32L is the timing corresponding to the first operation mode when the special role is won.

In other words, when the special role notification effect is performed, even if it is not triggered by a special role, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode if the player wants to determine the type of the winning role. It is considered to be operated by Therefore, by setting the notification mode of the specific notification effect during AT to the same notification mode as the notification mode of the specific role notification effect, it is possible to expect that the same operation will be performed even when the special role is won, and during AT. Since there is no need to store performance data dedicated to the specific notification performance, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity. Conversely, from the player's point of view, when the special combination notification effect or the specific notification effect during AT is performed, it can be understood that there is a possibility that the special combination has been won. It is thought that the 32L "BAR" pattern is first aimed at and operated. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between cherries A to C, and it is possible to fully understand the game characteristics such as the additional winning probability that differs depending on the winning result. It is possible to make you feel

If it is determined in step S3904 that the special role is not won, it is determined in step S3909 whether or not the special role is won.If the special role is won, the special role is notified in step S3910. Executes processing for performing production. Steps S3909 and S3910 are the same as steps S2006 and S2007. If a negative determination is made in step S3902, step S3905 or step S3909, or after executing the processing of step S3903, step S3908 or step S3910, the process proceeds to step S2008 to execute a precursor effect setting process at the start.

By doing so, as shown in FIG. 82(c), the operation mode at the time of winning a special role is changed according to the relationship between winning and reaching the upper limit. can be varied according to the That is, in the AT mode, when the first operation winning notice command is received, if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the additional lottery will be won, and if it is meaningful to perform the additional lottery due to the additional winning. By operating in the first operation mode, the net increase in the number of cards in the AT mode can be expected to increase by about 2.74 cards per game. On the other hand, in the AT mode, if the first operation winning notice command is received and the operation is performed in the first operation mode, even if the additional lottery is won, even if the addition due to the additional winning is performed. If the situation is meaningless, by operating in the second operation mode, the net increase in the number of cards in the AT mode can be expected to increase by about 2.98 cards per game. The number of net increases is greater than when operating in this mode. In this way, if it is meaningless to win an additional lottery, the user is made to operate in an operation mode in which the additional lottery is not performed, and the medal increase speed is improved, so that the upper limit increase number of medals can be increased earlier. or increase the number of increments when the maximum number of games is reached.

Furthermore, in a situation where it is not confirmed that the upper limit is reached before the first excess command or the second excess command is received, regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received, a specific notification effect during AT (Special combination notification effect) may be executed in some cases. If this is done, it becomes impossible or difficult to determine whether or not the player wins the additional lottery, so that it may be necessary to always operate in the first operation mode when the special role is won. Then, the net increase in the number of cards in the game progressing in this manner can be expected to increase by about 2.63 per game, and only when the first operation winning notice command is received, the specific notification effect during AT (specific role) It is less than the net increase number in the mode of executing the notification performance).

In this case, for example, in the early stages after shifting to the AT mode, the game is played in a mode in which a specific notification effect (specific role notification effect) is executed during AT regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received when the special role is won. If a predetermined opportunity occurs (for example, if a transition condition such as winning a transition lottery or consuming a predetermined number of sets is satisfied), only when the first operation winning notice command is received, specify during AT When switching to a game in a mode of executing a notification performance (specific role notification performance) and further, when a first excess command or a second excess command is received, an additional lottery is won by operating in a first operation mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode of notification is switched according to the situation, such as switching to a game in which the player is operated in the second operation mode. In addition, when the first operation winning notice command is received from the game in which the specific notification effect (specific role notification effect) is executed during AT regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received at the time of winning the special role After switching to a game in which the specific notification effect (specific role notification effect) is executed only during AT, furthermore, regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received when the special role is won, the specific notification effect (specific There may be a case where the game is switched to a mode in which a win notification effect is executed. In addition, regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received when the special role is won when shifting to AT mode, the game in the mode of executing the specific notification effect (specific role notification effect) during AT and the first operation winning notice command A lottery or the like may be used to determine whether the game is to be played in a mode in which the AT-during specific notification effect (specific combination notification effect) is executed only when it is received.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, the mode of notification of the pressing order when winning a special combination during the AT mode is different from that in the above-described embodiment. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, when a special role is won in the AT mode, the operation order corresponding to the predetermined 6th minor role winning among the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning is selected. It is configured to perform push-order notification and push-order notification effect. On the other hand, in the present modification, it is determined by lottery which of the first to sixth minor winning combinations should be notified of the operation sequence.

FIG. 83(a) is a flowchart showing part of the lottery result handling process in this modified example.

After executing the AT lottery process at the start in step S607 or after executing the AT addition process in step S609, it is determined in step S4001 whether or not the pressing order bell is won. If the pressing order bell is won, in steps S4002 to S4005, similarly to the processing of steps S611 to S614, if in the AT mode, it corresponds to the first to sixth minor winning prizes. If the AT mode is not in effect, the push order notification is not executed and the push order bell group notification is performed.

If it is not the bell winning in the order of pressing in step S4001, it is determined in step S4006 whether or not the special combination is winning. If the special combination is won, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set in step S4007, and if it is not set, the special combination is notified in step S4008. The processing of step S4008 is the same as the processing of step S617.

At step S4007, the AT mode flag is set, and in the case of winning a special role in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S4009. In step S4009, a notification small combination lottery process is executed. In the informing minor winning combination lottery process, it is determined by lottery which of the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination is to be notified of the pressing order of the operation order corresponding to the winning of the special winning combination this time. In this case, the notification minor combination lottery table stored in the various table storage area 105a is acquired, and which minor combination is to be notified of the pressing order is selected.

After the informing minor combination lottery process is executed in step S4009, in step S4010, the command monitor 68 is controlled to inform the pressing order of the operation order corresponding to the processing result of step S4009. Then, in step S4010, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command corresponding to the process result of step S4009 as an output target to the display control device 81, the lottery result corresponding process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4006, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

The information small combination lottery table used in the information small combination lottery process in step S4009, as shown in FIG. are set differently. Of these, the 2nd to 6th small wins, especially in settings 1, 3, and 5, the ratio of the 3rd and 5th small wins to be selected is the 2nd, 4th and 4th small wins. It is set to be higher than the ratio of selecting the 6th minor winning combination, and in settings 2 and 4, the ratio of selecting the 2nd minor winning combination, the 4th minor winning combination and the 6th minor winning combination is higher. It is possible to predict the set value from the reported selection rate of the minor winning combination, such as the fact that the third minor winning combination and the fifth minor winning combination are set to be higher than the selected rate. there is

In addition, the ratio of selecting the first minor combination differs particularly depending on the set value, and the setting value is such that the rate of selecting the first minor combination increases as the set value increases the payout rate (higher setting). there is Therefore, it is possible to predict the set value also from the selectivity of the first minor combination. Here, the pressing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination is the operation order of left→middle→right. , depending on the timing of the stop operation, the 33rd minor winning combination is established instead of the 1st minor winning winning combination.

That is, the stop switches 42 to 44 are in the AT mode when the press order of the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination is notified and at the timing when the 33rd minor combination can be established. is operated, if the 33rd minor winning combination is established instead of the 1st minor winning combination, the pressing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the 1st minor winning combination is triggered by the special winning combination. When the 1st minor winning combination is established instead of the 33rd minor winning combination, the pressing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the 1st minor winning combination is triggered by the pressing order bell. It can be understood that it was By doing so, in predicting the setting value from the ratio of the pressing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination, the pressing order bell is triggered by devising the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make a prediction while excluding the notification of the pressing order, thereby improving the prediction accuracy.

However, if an attempt is made to improve the prediction accuracy of such set values, one medal will be paid out instead of eight medals. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as allowing the player to select whether to improve the prediction accuracy of the set value or to increase the number of medals to be paid out.

Moreover, when a special role is won in the AT mode as described above, the pressing order notification corresponding to any of the first to sixth minor role winnings is performed, so each operation order is performed. It is possible to average the occurrence rate of the press order notification. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the pressing order notification corresponding to the predetermined operation order is likely to occur when the pressing order notification is performed. It can be made not to cause inconvenience. For example, in the AT mode, even when the pressing order bell is won or when the special combination is won, the pressing order bell is configured to generate the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect for the cherry A to C and the chances A to C, and then the pressing order bell. and the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect of the special combination and the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect of the cherry A to C and the chance numbers A to C are visually difficult to distinguish or cannot be identified. In the event that an effect, etc., occurs, the player must ensure that the pushing order notification effect, etc. is Cherry A to C or Chance A to C, which are likely to be won in the AT addition lottery, or that the special role is triggered. It can be assumed that there is something to be expected. However, if the rate of occurrence of the push-order notification effect, etc., is biased according to the operation order as described above, the result of the lottery cannot or cannot be predicted from the aspect of the push-order notification effect, etc. , the result of the lottery triggered by the operation order may be predicted. In this respect, as described above, it is possible to preferably avoid such a problem by adopting a mode in which bias in the operation order is less likely to occur.

In this modification, the variation (standard deviation) in the rate of occurrence of push order notifications corresponding to the first to sixth minor wins is 7% for setting 1, 5% for setting 2, 6% for setting 3, and 6% for setting 4. 7% at setting 5, 15% at setting 6, and the average variation of each setting value is 8%. On the other hand, the variation for each set value in the occurrence rate of the pressing order notification corresponding to the first minor combination is 13%, which is higher than the average value of variation in the pressing order notification for the first to sixth minor combinations. expensive. In other words, it is more efficient to predict the set value only from the occurrence rate of the pressing order notification for the first minor combination than to predict the set value from the occurrence rate of the pressing order notification for each minor combination. It is possible to

However, even if the pressing order notification corresponding to the first minor winning combination is performed when the special winning combination is won, if the second operating mode is operated instead of the first operating mode, the first minor winning combination will not be won. Although it is established, it cannot be determined whether or not it is triggered by winning the 1st and 2nd pushes of the bell. In other words, if the 1st minor role winning is established when the special role is won, it will be mixed with the 1st minor role winning triggered by the pressing order bell, making it impossible to efficiently predict the set value. . By doing so, if you want to predict the set value, you can realize the game property of aiming for the 33rd minor win on the side with the smaller number of payouts. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, a small notification winning combination at the time of winning a special combination is drawn at a predetermined opportunity, and the small notification winning combination is determined by using the result of the lottery at the time of winning a special combination after that. FIG. 84(a) is a flow chart showing processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section in this modified example. The advantageous section transition process is a process executed in step S1706 in the first section display process (FIG. 45).

In step S4021, the lottery result of the current game is grasped, in the following step S4022, a process of obtaining a ceiling game number table is executed, and in step S4023, a ceiling game number lottery process is executed. Then, in step S4024, the processing result of step S4023 is input to the ceiling counter, and in step S4025, a ceiling command including information on the number of ceiling games is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. As described above, for the ceiling counter, a subtraction value lottery is performed according to the lottery result of each game, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the transition to the AT mode occurs without going through the AT mode transition lottery. .

In step S4026, a notification small combination lottery process is executed. The information small combination lottery table used in the information small combination lottery process in this modification, as shown in FIG. set in different proportions. Of the six operational orders, five operational orders are set to have the same selectivity. configured differently. The operation order different from the selection rate of the other operation order is set differently depending on the set value.

In this case, the variation in the selection rate of the pressing order notification for the 1st to 6th minor wins and the variation for each setting value in each pressing order notification are the same value. , the occurrence rates of the 1st to 6th small wins must be counted. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value, and it is possible to improve the fairness of the game.

After executing the notification small combination lottery process in step S4026, after executing the process of storing the small combination of the lottery result in the notification small combination counter of the various counter areas 106e in step S4027, this advantageous section shift time process exit. In this case, if the first minor winning combination is selected as a result of the processing in step S4026, 1 is input to the reported minor winning combination counter, and if the second minor winning combination is selected, 2 is entered to the reporting minor winning combination counter. Any value from 1 to 6 is input to the notification minor combination counter. Then, in step S618 in the lottery result handling process in this modified example, the pressing order notification to be executed is determined by referring to the value of the notification minor combination counter. That is, if 1 is input to the small winning combination counter, the notification of the pressing order of the first small combination is executed, and a pressing order notification command corresponding to the first small combination is set (step S619), and the small winning combination counter is set. If 2 is input in the , the pressing order notification of the second minor combination is executed, and the pressing order notification command corresponding to the second minor combination is set.

By doing so, while generating randomness in the notification of the pressing order, there is no need to execute the notification small winning combination lottery process when the special winning combination is won, so it is possible to reduce the processing load of each game. .

As described above, since the notification small winning lottery process is executed in the advantageous section transition process, each time the advantageous section is transitioned (each time the advantageous section ends), the notification small when winning the special role Roles will change. By doing so, the notification of the pushing order becomes more random, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as the fact that the winning of the special role is discovered due to the unevenness of the notification of the pushing order. It is also possible to improve the difficulty of the set value prediction game, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, a modified example of the notification minor combination lottery table will be described.

FIG. 85(a) shows an example in which the pressing order notification corresponding to the first minor winning combination or the second minor winning combination is not selected. In other words, the order of operations corresponding to the first minor winning combination and the second minor winning combination, in which there is a possibility of the first operation mode when the special winning combination is won, is not selected. By doing so, it is possible to minimize the possibility of winning the 33rd minor combination with a small number of medals to be paid out during the AT mode, and to achieve a smoother increase in medals.

In FIG. 85(b), in the configuration in which the notification of the pressing order of the first and second minor winnings does not occur when the special winning combination is won as described above, the winning probability of the pressing order bell side is adjusted to notify each pressing order. It shows an example of equalization.

That is, as shown in FIG. 85(b1), since the special role is won with a probability of about 5% (about 1/20) in each game, the special role is triggered in each game during the AT mode. The notification of the pressing order corresponding to the minor win to the sixth minor win occurs with a probability of about 1.25%. On the other hand, the pressing order information corresponding to the first to second minor wins triggered by the special win does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85(b2), the order bells to be pushed in each game with a probability of approximately 64% (approximately 1/1.56) are selected as the order bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the first minor combination. and the pinching bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the 2nd minor winning combination are set so as to be easier to win than the winning combinations corresponding to the other 3rd to 6th minor winning combinations. In this modification, 18% of the total pressing order bells are allocated to the forward pressing bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the first small winning combination and the sandwiched pressing bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the second small winning combination, and other 16% is allocated to the role of As a result, in each game, with the push order bell as a trigger, the push order notification corresponding to the 1st and 2nd small wins occurs with a probability of about 11.54%, and the 3rd to 6th small wins The corresponding press order announcements each occur with a probability of approximately 10.25%.

When the pressing order notification triggered by these special roles and the pressing order notification triggered by the pressing order bell are totaled, as shown in FIG. The pressing order information corresponding to the 3rd to 6th minor wins respectively occurs with a probability of about 11.54%. As a result, it is possible to make the difference (approximately 0.04%) smaller than the difference (approximately 1.25%) in the occurrence rate of each notification in the special role. In this way, by compensating for the bias in the notification of the pushing order triggered by the special combination with the notification of the pushing order of other results, it is possible to preferably equalize the notification of the pushing order, and the notification of the pushing order can be achieved. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game result is predicted from the

<Modification 10>
In this modified example, even in the advantageous zone transition lottery process triggered by a special combination, the contents of the lottery process are varied depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42-44. In the above embodiment, the configuration is such that the advantageous zone transition lottery process is executed at the start of the game, but in this modified example, the configuration is changed so that it is executed at the end of the game. Although a detailed description of this point with reference to the drawings is omitted, in the lottery result handling process in this modified example, when it is determined that the advantageous section flag is not set in step S604, the advantageous section transition lottery in step S605 is performed. The lottery result handling process is terminated as it is without executing the process. The advantageous section transition lottery process in this modification is configured to be executed in the second section display process of step S416 in the reel control process (FIG. 22).

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the second section display process in this modified example.

In this modification, if it is determined in step S4101 that the advantageous section flag is not set, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S4111, and then the second section display processing is terminated. Otherwise, the processing of steps S4101 to S4110 is the same as the processing of steps S1801 to S1810.

FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section transition lottery process in this modified example.

In this modification, after grasping the game lottery result in step S4201, a process of grasping the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the current game is executed in step S4202. Then, in step S4203, a process for acquiring an advantageous zone transition lottery table is executed, in step S4204 a random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is acquired, and in step S4205 an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the advantageous section transition lottery table in this modification has a different probability of winning a transition lottery triggered by a special role compared to that of the above-described embodiment, and other results. The odds of winning the transition lottery triggered by are the same. Specifically, in this modification, the probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery is higher when the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the special role winning game is the first operation mode than when the operation mode is the second operation mode. is set so as to be high, winning the advantageous section transition lottery with 100% probability in the first operation mode, and winning the advantageous area transition lottery with 0% probability in the second operation mode. That is, it is set so as not to shift to the advantageous section in the second operation mode.

After the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S4205, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won in step S4206. Execute the processing to be performed. Through such processing, the advantageous section flag is set in the first section display processing of the next game.

After executing the process of step S4207, the process at the time of transition to an advantageous section is executed in step S4208. That is, in this modification, the advantageous section transition processing is not executed in step S1706 of the first section display processing (FIG. 45), but is executed in step S4208. If a negative determination is made in step S4206, or after the process of step S4208 is executed, the advantageous zone transition lottery process is terminated.

In other words, in this modification, when a special role is won in a normal section and the first operation mode is operated, the game transitions to an advantageous section, while when a special role is won and the game is operated in the second operation mode, the game enters an advantageous section. will not migrate. As described above, when operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor winning prize is established and one medal is paid out, and when operated in the second operating mode, the 1st to 6th minor winning prizes are awarded. It is established and 8 medals are paid out. In the internal state, an advantageous zone transition lottery is held in a 3-bet game, and all lottery results excluding the result of losing and a special role win the advantageous zone transition lottery, so when a special role is won, the first minor role is won. Even if the 6th minor win is established and the game is not shifted to the advantageous section in the current game, if the next game is shifted to the advantageous section, the number of medals will increase by two, which is advantageous for the player. Become. In other words, it is advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode in the normal section.

In the advantageous section transition process in step S4208, the ceiling game number is set according to the lottery result of each game. Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 88, in step S4301, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step S4302, a process of obtaining a ceiling game number table is executed, and in step S4303, a ceiling game number lottery process is executed. Then, in step S4304, the processing result of step S4303 is input to the ceiling counter, and in step S4305, the ceiling command including information on the number of ceiling games is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. , terminates this advantageous section transition processing.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the ceiling game number table in this modified example has a maximum ceiling of 700 games except for the ceiling game number lottery triggered by a special role, and the maximum ceiling game number is set according to the lottery result. It is set so that the number of ceiling games that is less than the maximum number can be selected. Specifically, the game lottery results are set so that the lower the appearance rate of the game, the easier it is to select a smaller ceiling game number. is set to be easily selected.

The number of ceiling games to be selected with the winning of a special role as a trigger is set so that the number of ceiling games to be selected varies depending on the operation mode of the winning game of the special role, and 700 games are selected in the first operation mode. In the case of the second operation mode, 1000 games, which is more than the 700 games, is selected as the ceiling number of games. However, in this modification, as described above, in the special role winning game, if the game is operated in the second operation mode, it is set so as not to win the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, the number of ceiling games is substantially 700 games.

In other words, if the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section in the special role winning game, the situation is more disadvantageous for the player than the case of shifting to the advantageous section in other lottery results, even in terms of the number of ceiling games to be selected. can occur, and the number of ceiling games is 700 games when shifting to the advantageous section in the special role winning game, but if it is shifted to the advantageous section by another lottery result, the number of games is less than the 700 games A number can be selected as the ceiling game number. In this case, in the normal section, when the special role is won, the operation is performed in the second operation mode to avoid the transition to the advantageous section in the game, and to move to the advantageous section in the next and subsequent games according to other lottery results. It is more advantageous for the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 89(b), depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44, the number of medals to be paid out differs, and the contents of the processing related to the instruction function differ in the special role, whichever is the normal section or the advantageous section. It will be different whether it is more advantageous to operate in the operation mode of . That is, in the advantageous section, the AT mode transition lottery and the additional lottery in the processing related to the instruction function are executed in the first operation mode, but the AT mode transition lottery and the additional lottery are executed in the second operation mode. is not executed, in the game property aiming to increase medals by shifting to AT mode, if it is in the advantageous section, the special role winning game is operated in the second operation mode by the person who operates in the first operation mode. It is more advantageous for the player than On the other hand, in the normal section, if the first operation mode is selected, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in the processing related to the instruction function, but if the second operation mode is selected, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed. At first glance, it seems that operating in the first operation mode is more advantageous than operating in the second operation mode in terms of game characteristics in which the player aims to shift to the advantageous section and shift to the AT mode. However, as described above, it is set so that the number of ceiling games can be smaller when shifting to an advantageous section triggered by another result than when shifting to an advantageous section triggered by a special role. Therefore, substantially, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode than to operate in the first operation mode when a special combination is won in the normal section. Therefore, the operation modes that are advantageous at the time of winning the special combination are different between the normal section and the advantageous section, and by using such a configuration, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 11>
In this modified example, an example in which a plurality of types of special roles are provided will be described.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), in this modification, the first privilege is provided by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode on the lottery table for the normal game state in the 3-bet game. In addition, a first process is executed as a process relating to the instruction function, and a second privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege is given by operating in the second operation mode, and a game is played more than the first process as a process relating to the instruction function. A special combination A, a special combination B, and a special combination C are set as special combinations for which the second process disadvantageous to the player is executed. All of the special roles A to C are set to be won with a probability of about 1/60, and the probability of winning any of the special roles A to C is about 1/20. Similar to morphology.

As shown in FIG. 90(b), in this modification, the first operation mode and the second operation mode set for each of the special roles A to C are different, and the winning results are different from those in the above embodiment. ing.

Specifically, in the special combination A, the left stop switch 42 is set to be operated first as a specific number as the first operation mode, and the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first as a specific number. is set as the second operation mode, and when it is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of any one of the 9th to 33rd small wins is established instead of the 33rd minor win, and 1 8 medals are paid out, and when operated in the second operation mode, winning of any of the 3rd to 6th minor wins is established and 8 medals are paid out.

In addition, the special role B is set as the first operation mode to operate the middle stop switch 43 as a specific number first, and the left stop switch 42 or the right stop switch 44 can be operated first as a specific number. It is set as the second operation mode, and when it is operated in the first operation mode, it is not the 33rd minor win, but one of the 9th to 33rd minor wins is established and one medal is awarded. Payout occurs, and when operated in the second operation mode, winning of any of the first, second, fifth, and sixth minor wins is established, and eight medals are paid out. .

For the special combination C, the first operation mode is set to operate the right stop switch 44 as a specific number, and the second operation mode is to operate the left stop switch 42 or the middle stop switch 43 as a specific number first. It is set as an operation mode, and when it is operated in the first operation mode, it is not the 33rd minor winning combination, but one of the 9th minor winning combination to the 33rd minor winning combination is established and one medal is paid out. When operated in the second operation mode, winning of any one of the first to fourth minor wins is established and eight medals are paid out.

The first processing and second processing as processing related to the instruction function of each special role A to C are the same as in the above embodiment, and when operated in the first operation mode, the probability is 10% in the normal mode. The AT mode transition is won, and in the CZ mode, the AT mode transition is won with a probability of 50%, but when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the AT mode transition is not won. Also, during the AT mode, there is a 10% chance that the winning will be added regardless of the mode of operation.

That is, in this modification, in each special role A to C, the first operation mode is set as the second operation mode in another special role, and the second operation mode is the first operation mode in another special role. is set as Specifically, the first operation mode of the special role A is the second operation mode of the special roles B and C, and the second operation mode of the special role A is the first operation mode of the special role B. Also, the first operation mode of the special role B is the second operation mode of the special role A and the special role C, and the second operation mode of the special role B is the first operation mode of the special role C. The first operation mode of the special role C is the second operation mode of the special roles A and B, and the second operation mode of the special role C is the first operation mode of the special role A.

In addition, in the special roles A to C in this modified example, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is associated with the first operation mode and the second operation mode, but the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not mapped. In other words, by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the operation order associated with the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode and the second operation mode regardless of the operation timing. As a result, the winning of the corresponding result is established, and the processing related to the instruction function is executed.

By doing so, for example, even if the same stop switch is operated first in each game, the operation mode at the time of winning the special combination is not only the first operation mode but also the second operation mode. It can also be an operation mode. That is, in the above embodiment, when the game is played in the operation mode in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the operation mode may be the first operation mode or the second operation mode. When the game is played in the game mode in which the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the first operation mode is not changed and the second operation mode is always selected. On the other hand, in this modified example, even if the game is played in the operation mode in which any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated first, not only the first operation mode but also the second operation mode can be used. . Therefore, it becomes easier to secure the fairness of the game.

However, when a special role is won, either the first operation mode is operated to advance the processing related to the instruction function advantageously, or the second operation mode is operated so that many medals can be obtained. It is up to the player to select a game, and the player can select it in this modified example as well. A configuration for that purpose will be described below.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing part of the lottery result handling process in this modification.

If it is determined in step S610 that the lottery result of the current game does not indicate that the pressing order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S4401. In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game this time is any special combination winning, and if the special combination is not winning, this lottery result corresponding processing is terminated as it is. If any special combination is won, the process proceeds to step S4402.

In step S4402, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set and the AT mode is in progress. If it is not in the AT mode, it is determined whether or not the special combination that has been won this time is the special combination A in step S4403. If it is the special win A, in step S4404, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to notify that it is the special win A among the operation mode wins.

Here, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. , "9" are set to indicate the type of the operation mode combination, with "7" corresponding to the special combination A, "8" corresponding to the special combination B, and "9" corresponding to the special combination C. It is That is, in the case of the special combination A in the operation mode combination, the first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7-- are lit and displayed to display "7". Further, in the case of the special win B in the operation mode combination, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 to are illuminated and "8" is displayed. Then, in the case of the special win C in the operation mode combination, the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3 and the fifth display segment N5 to the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed to indicate "9". is displayed. Any of these "7" to "9" displays are identifiable by the player, and the player is informed of which of the special roles A to C has been won by the type of operation mode combination. It is possible to grasp from

In step S4404, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that "7" is displayed as a notification of the special combination A among the operation mode combinations. As a result, the lottery result of the game this time is a special role A winning, and the first operation mode is obtained by operating the left stop switch 42 first, and the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first. The player can grasp that the second operation mode is set.

Furthermore, in this modified example, it is possible for the display control device 81 side to generate the pressing order notification effect even in a mode other than the AT mode.

That is, after executing the process of step S4404, it is determined whether or not the switch flag for A is set in the various flag storage area 183a in step S4405. The switching flag for A is a flag for adjusting the occurrence frequency of each pressing order notification effect when performing the pressing order notification effect when the special combination A is won. That is, if it is determined that the switch flag for A is not set, in step S4406, the process of setting the switch flag for A is executed, and in the subsequent step S4407, if the pressing order is Bell, the first minor combination After executing the process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to (left→middle→right) as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4405 that the switch flag for A has been set, processing for clearing the switch flag for A is executed in step S4408. After executing the process of setting the push order notification command in the operation order (left→right→middle) corresponding to the combination as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4403 that it is not the special role A, the process advances to step S4410 to determine whether or not the special role won this time is the special role B. If it is the special winning combination B, in step S4411, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to display "8" as a notification that it is the special winning combination B among the operation mode hands. Then, in step S4412, it is determined whether or not the switching flag for B is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If the switching flag for B is not set, a process for setting the switching flag for B is executed in step S4413. →Right) is executed to set the pressing order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4412 that the switching flag for B has been set, processing for clearing the switching flag for B is executed in step S4415. After executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order (middle→right→left) corresponding to the combination as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated.

Further, if it is determined in step S4410 that it is not the special winning combination B, it means that the current special winning combination is the special winning combination C. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that "9" is displayed as a notification to that effect. Then, in step S4418, it is determined whether or not the switching flag for C is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If the switching flag for C is not set, a process for setting the switching flag for C is executed in step S4419. → middle) is executed as an output target for the display control device 81, and then this lottery result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4418 that the switching flag for C has been set, processing for clearing the switching flag for C is executed in step S4421. After executing the process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order (right→middle→left) corresponding to the combination as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 90(c), when a special combination A to C is won in the normal mode or the CZ mode, the instruction monitor 68 notifies that the special combination is the special combination A to C as the type of operation mode combination. are performed respectively. As a result, for example, the lottery result of the current game is that the special role A is won, and the left stop switch 42 is operated first to enter the first operation mode, and the middle stop switch 43 and the right stop switch 44 are operated first. By doing so, the player can grasp that the second operation mode is set, and the lottery result of the game this time is the winning of the special role B, and the first operation mode is set by operating the middle stop switch 43 first, By operating the left stop switch 42 or the right stop switch 44 first, the player can grasp that the second operation mode will be entered, and the lottery result of the game this time is a special role C winning, and the right stop switch The player can understand that the first operation mode is entered by operating 44 first, and the second operation mode is entered by first operating the left stop switch 42 or the middle stop switch 43 .

Here, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 91, the notification mode of the pressing order notification effect when the special combination or the pressing order bell is won in the AT mode, and the pressing order notification when the special combination is won in the normal mode or CZ mode. It is different from the notification mode of production. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(a), in the special role in the AT mode and the press order notification effect when the press order bell is won, for example, numbers are attached to the yellow characters corresponding to the "bell" pattern. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 91(b), in normal mode or CZ mode, in the pressing order notification effect when winning a special combination, numbers The color of the characters marked with is different from that in the AT mode. there). By doing so, when the pressing order notification effect is generated before the shift to the AT mode, the player can understand that the pressing order notification effect does not correspond to the pressing order bell but to the special combination. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player of the fact that none of the 1st to 6th minor wins are won even though the operation is performed in accordance with the pressing order notification effect, so as not to give a sense of incongruity. can. In this modification, as described above, during the AT mode, the notification mode is common between the pressing order notification effect when the special combination is won and the pressing order notification effect when the pressing order bell is won. By doing so, it is possible to expect the effect of pushing the special role winning and confusing it with the order bell winning.

Furthermore, as the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side, in the case of the special win A, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the first minor win and the operation order corresponding to the second minor win. The corresponding pressing order notification effect is alternately executed, and in the case of the special win B, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the third minor win and the operation order corresponding to the fourth minor win are executed. The corresponding pressing order notification effects are alternately executed, and in the case of the special win C, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the fifth minor combination and the operation order corresponding to the sixth minor combination are executed. The corresponding pressing order notification effect is alternately executed. By doing so, in the normal mode and the CZ mode, it is possible to receive the AT mode shift lottery on the advantageous side more surely when the special roles A to C are won by the pressing order notification performance, and to generate it. It is possible to suppress bias in the pressing order notification effect.

If it is determined in step S4402 that the special combination has been won in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S4423. In step S4423, it is determined whether or not the special role won this time is the special role A. If it is the special role A, it is determined in step S4424 whether or not the switch flag for A is set. If the switch flag for A is not set, the process of setting the switch flag for A is executed in step S4425. →Right) is controlled so that the instruction monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order. Then, in step S4427, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the third minor combination as an output target to the display control device 81, the lottery result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4424 that the switch flag for A has been set, processing for clearing the switch flag for A is executed in step S4428. Control is performed so that the command monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order of the operation order (middle→right→left) corresponding to the combination. Then, in step S4430, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the fourth minor combination as an output target to the display control device 81, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4423 that it is not the special role A, it is determined in step S4431 whether or not the special role won this time is the special role B. If it is the special role B, it is determined in step S4432 whether or not the switching flag for B is set. If the switching flag for B is not set, a process for setting the switching flag for B is executed in step S4433. →Middle) is controlled so that the instruction monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order. Then, in step S4435, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the fifth minor combination as an output target to the display control device 81, the lottery result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4432 that the switching flag for B has been set, processing for clearing the switching flag for B is executed in step S4436. Control is performed so that the instruction monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order of the operation order (right→middle→left) corresponding to the combination. Then, in step S4438, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the sixth minor combination as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4431 that it is not the special role B, it means that the special role won this time is the special role C. In this case, in step S4439, it is determined whether or not the switch flag for C is set. If the switching flag for C is not set, a process for setting the switching flag for C is executed in step S4440. →Right) is controlled so that the instruction monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order. Then, in step S4442, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination as an output target to the display control device 81, the lottery result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4439 that the switching flag for C has been set, processing for clearing the switching flag for C is executed in step S4443. Control is performed so that the command monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order of the operation order (left→right→middle) corresponding to the combination. Then, in step S4444, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the second minor combination as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated.

That is, as shown in FIG. 90(c), in the case of the special winning A, the pressing order corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the third minor winning is displayed as the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side during the AT mode. The notification effect and the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the fourth minor win are alternately executed, and in the case of the special win B, the pressing order corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the fifth minor win. The notification effect and the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the sixth minor combination are alternately executed, and in the case of the special combination C, the pressing order corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination is executed. The notification effect and the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the second minor combination are alternately executed. By doing so, in the AT mode, it is possible to establish a small winning combination with a large number of medals paid out when the special roles A to C are won by the pressing order notification effect, and the generated pressing order notification effect is biased. can be suppressed.

As described above, in this modification, a plurality of types of special roles are provided, and the first operation mode and the second operation mode are alternately set for each special role. When the operation is continued in one operation mode, the other special combination is operated in the second operation mode, and the game in the first operation mode and the game in the second operation mode are equally performed in each special combination. A game can be played, and the fairness of the game can be easily secured.

In addition, when each special combination is won, in the normal mode and CZ mode, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first operation mode is generated, and in the AT mode, the pressing order notification corresponding to the second operation mode is generated. Any special role can be operated in the first operation mode until the shift to the AT mode, and can be operated in the second operation mode after the shift to the AT mode. It is also possible to play the game in the above embodiment.

Furthermore, in the configuration in which the first operation mode and the second operation mode correspond to the operation order in which a plurality of small wins are won if the bell is pressed in order, the operation order to be notified to the winning special role is switched. . That is, for example, in the special role A, before shifting to the AT mode, if the pressing order is a bell, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order of the first and second minor wins is alternately switched, and after shifting to the AT mode. If it is the pressing order bell, the operation order corresponding to the third minor combination and the fourth minor combination is alternately switched. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate bias in the pressing order notification effect with a relatively simple configuration.

<Modification 12>
In this modified example, in a configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided as in modified example 11, an example will be described in which the mode of processing relating to the instruction function is changed for each special role. Specifically, in this modified example, the processing relating to the instruction function in the AT is made different between the special combination A, the special combination B, and the special combination C.

As shown in FIG. 93(a), the first operation mode and the second operation mode for the special roles A to C are the same as in the eleventh modification, and the first operation mode for the special role A is the special role B, C, the first operation mode of the special role B is the second operation mode of the special roles C, A, and the first operation mode of the special role C is the second operation mode of the special roles A, B is set as In addition, before the AT mode transition, it is possible to receive the AT mode transition lottery by operating any of the special roles A to C in the first operation mode, and by operating in the second operation mode AT mode It is set so that you cannot receive the transfer lottery.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 94, during the AT mode, the same AT addition lottery is executed regardless of the operation mode, as in the case of modification 11, for the special hands A and B. That is, the probability of winning the additional lottery is the same regardless of whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode. On the other hand, in the special role C, even in the AT mode, the advantage of the additional lottery differs depending on whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode. Although it is possible to win an additional prize when operated in the first operation mode, it is set so as not to win an additional prize when operated in the second operation mode. The specific processing in this case will not be described with reference to the drawings, but for special roles A and B, for example, an additional lottery is performed so that an additional winning can be obtained by the AT addition processing in FIG. If it is a special combination C, it is preferable to perform an additional lottery so that an additional lottery can be won according to the operation mode in the stop AT additional processing in FIG. 78 and the like.

As for the pressing order notification effect in the AT mode, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the second operation mode is performed for the special winnings A and B. On the other hand, as for the special combination C, based on the addition prior determination processing such as FIG. On the other hand, if an additional winning is not achieved even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the pressing order notification performance corresponding to the second operation mode is performed.

In this way, by making the contents of the processing related to the instruction function different depending on the special role, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to which special role is won, and to increase the expectation when the pressing order notification effect occurs. It can be changed according to the operation order indicated by the pressing order notification effect.

That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 94, the special bonuses A and B are won with a probability of 30% in the process for adding AT at the start, and the special role C is the first operation mode in the process for adding AT at the time of stop. 93(b), special role A and special role B are shown in FIG. 93(b). The degree of additional winning expectation is the same, and it can be expected that about 30% of the pushing order notification effects that can occur with the special roles A and B as a trigger will result in an additional winning. On the other hand, with respect to the special combination C, if the pressing order notification effect of the operation order corresponding to the first operation mode is generated, there is a 100% probability that the winning will be additionally won. When the forward notification performance is generated, the winning is additionally won with a probability of 0%. By doing so, the degree of expectation for additional winning will differ greatly depending on the content indicated by the pressing order notification effect, and the degree of attention to the pressing order notification effect can be preferably increased.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) The privilege when operated in the first operation mode and the privilege when operated in the second operation mode in the special role winning game are not limited to those described above. That is, when operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor winning combination or the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established and one medal is paid out, and the operation is performed in the second operating mode. In this case, the 1st to 6th small wins are established and 8 medals are paid out. It may be a configuration, a configuration in which one medal is paid out, and a configuration in which more than one medal is paid out, or a configuration in which winning is not established as a result of either of these medals may be lost. , at least, the privilege (the number of medals) may be set to be smaller than when operated in the second operation mode. Further, when operated in the second operation mode, a configuration may be adopted in which more than eight medals are paid out, or less than eight medals are paid out.

Furthermore, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the game state does not shift or shifts to the first state, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the game state is changed from the previous state or the first state. It may be configured to shift to a second state that is advantageous for the player. For example, the first state and the second state are RT states in which the probability of winning a replay is improved, and the probability of winning a replay is higher in the second state than in the first state, or the RT state A configuration may be adopted in which the number of continuous games is increased or the continuation rate is increased. Also, a bonus state in which the odds of winning a minor combination are different may be set as the second state, and a bonus state in which the bonus state is less advantageous than the bonus state as the second state may be set as the first state.

In any case, if the configuration is such that the privilege given when the operation is performed in the second operation mode is more advantageous to the player than the privilege given when the operation is performed in the first operation mode. Just do it.

(2) In the special role winning game, the processing regarding the instruction function when operated in the first operation mode and the processing regarding the instruction function when operated in the second operation mode are not limited to the above. For example, although the AT mode transition lottery is performed regardless of whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is higher in the first operation mode and in the second operation mode. If the AT mode transition wins, the AT mode in which the first operation mode is more advantageous than the second operation mode (large number of games, large number of sets, set continuation rate It is also possible to adopt a configuration that makes it easy to shift to a high value, easy to win extra, etc.). Further, the first operation mode may be configured to be more likely to win an additional win than the second operation mode, and the case of winning an additional win in the first operation mode is more likely than the case of winning an extra win in the second operation mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of additional games and the number of additional sets at the time of additional winning are large. Further, when operated in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode transition lottery are performed, while when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, only the CZ mode transition lottery is performed. When operated in the first operation mode, an AT mode transition lottery is performed, and when operated in the second operation mode, a CZ mode transition lottery is performed. Instead, a configuration may be adopted in which the types of processing are also different.

When operated in the first operation mode, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than in the case of operation in the second operation mode, and the AT mode is shifted to with the first operation mode as a trigger. A configuration may be adopted in which the player is more advantageous to the AT mode, in which the transition is triggered by the second operation mode, rather than the AT mode. In addition, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, it is easier to win an additional win than when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the addition of the AT mode triggered by the second operation mode is more advantageous for the player, such as a larger number of games to be added or a larger number of sets. In these cases, considering the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery and the advantage of the AT mode to be switched to, and the winning probability of the additional lottery and the additional advantage at the time of winning, the first operation mode is better than the second operation mode. It is preferable that the configuration is also advantageous for the player.

(3) When operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, the first privilege is granted and the first process is executed as the processing related to the instruction function, while the operation is performed in the second operation mode. In a configuration in which a second privilege is granted and a second process is executed as a process related to the instruction function when the The relationship with the difference in the degree of advantage with is not limited to the above. That is, in the above, one medal is paid out as the first privilege, eight medals are paid out as the second privilege, and the AT mode transition is won with a high probability as the first process, and as the second process By using such a configuration as not winning the AT mode transition, it is set so that the player is more advantageous to operate in the first operation mode in order to aim at the AT mode transition. By changing this, for example, the difference in advantage between the first privilege and the second privilege is made larger than the above, and the difference in the advantage between the first process and the second process is made smaller than the above. For example, in order to aim at shifting to the AT mode, it may be more advantageous to aim at the ceiling by operating in the second operation mode than in the first operation mode.

(4) When operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, the number of games up to the ceiling (ceiling counter) is subtracted, and when operated in the second operation mode, the number of games up to the ceiling is reduced. Although the number of games is not subtracted, the number of games up to the ceiling may be added when operated in the second operation mode. In this case, the number of games to be added is a uniform number of games. Alternatively, the number of games to be added may be determined by lottery or the like. Further, when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the subtraction of the number of games up to the ceiling may not be performed not only for the current game but also for a specific number of games (for example, 5) thereafter. It is also possible to use a configuration in which a specific number for which the operation is not performed is determined by lottery. In the case of a configuration in which the number of games to be added and the number of games not to be subtracted are determined by lottery, the number of games to be added and the number of games to stop subtraction that are likely to be selected may differ according to the set value. A configuration may be adopted in which a small number of games to be added or a number of games to stop subtraction are easily selected.

(5) Examples in which the first operation mode and the second operation mode are distinguished depending on the type and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 that perform the first stop operation, and examples of the stop switches 42 to 44 that perform the first operation mode An example in which the first operation mode and the second operation mode are distinguished according to the type is shown, and the first stop operation is set to be the branch timing of both operation modes, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed. Both operation modes may be distinguished by the type and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, or both operation modes may be distinguished by the type of the stop switches 42 to 44 that perform the second stop operation and the third stop operation. In these cases, the second stop operation and the third stop operation, which are distinguished from each other, may be applied to each of the above inventions as branch timings of both operation modes.

(6) The ratio of winning the AT mode transition triggered by a special role is about half of the ratio of winning the AT mode transition triggered by other results, but this is just an example, and the AT mode triggered by a special role The transition winning percentage may be lower or higher than this. In addition, in the normal mode, the ratio of winning the AT mode transition with the special role as a trigger is set lower than the other, and in the CZ mode, the ratio of winning the AT mode transition with the special role as the trigger is set higher than the other. It may be reversed.

(7) The degree of advantage of the AT mode to be shifted may be different between the case where the AT mode transition is won due to the special role and the case where the AT mode transition is won due to another result. When AT mode transition wins with a role as a trigger, the player is configured to transition to AT mode more advantageous than when AT mode transition wins with other results as a trigger, or vice versa. Also good.

(8) The AT mode when reaching the ceiling and the AT mode transition before reaching the ceiling may have different advantages, and the AT mode when reaching the ceiling may be changed to the AT mode before reaching the ceiling by winning the lottery. By adopting a structure that is more advantageous than the AT mode based on the lottery, in a game in which a special role is won near the ceiling, the AT mode shift is performed in the second operation mode rather than receiving the AT mode shift lottery in the first operation mode. It is possible to realize a game feature that allows the player to select both operation modes when winning a special role in relation to the number of ceiling games, such that it is advantageous for the player not to receive the lottery.

(9) The effects of each game during the CZ mode are not limited to those described above. At least, by adopting a complete notification type production mode in which the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified in each game, the result of the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the special role is notified in the game in which the special role is won. The significance of doing so is enhanced. For example, in the bomb effect, switching from the bomb image BP to the explosion image EP or the unexploded image NP may be performed based on the player's operation of the predetermined operation unit. A production switch 66 for production may be used as the predetermined operation unit. It should be noted that, in the case of a configuration in which switching from the bomb image BP to the explosion image EP or the unexploded image NP is performed based on the player's operation as described above, the start lever 41 is displayed at least in the game subsequent to the game in which the bomb effect is started. It is preferable that the switching is performed before the operation is performed, and the switching is based on the betting operation of the next game, such as inserting medals from the first credit insertion switch 56 or the medal insertion slot 45. may be configured to perform Incidentally, even in the above-described embodiment, betting operations for the next game such as inserting medals from the first credit insertion switch 56 or the medal insertion slot 45 are performed after the bomb effect is started and before switching to the explosion image EP or the unexploded image NP. In the event that a bet is made, it is preferable to switch to a planned image, notify AT winners, etc., based on the above-described bet operation.

(10) In a game in which a special role is won during the CZ mode, if the AT mode is not won, the notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery for that game may be carried over to the next game or later. In this case, since the AT mode is not won, the AT mode is not started from the game following the game in which the special role is won.

(11) A configuration may be adopted in which the AT mode win notification during the CZ mode is executed before the double eyes effect after the third stop operation. In this case, the notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery based on the result other than the special combination can be executed after the start lever 41 is operated. It is possible to notify the results of the AT mode transition lottery before the third stop operation. Then, it is preferable that the timing of notifying the result of the AT mode transition lottery based on the special role may be the same timing as the timing of notifying the result of the AT mode transition lottery based on the result other than the special role.

(12) In the double eyes effect executed when winning the AT mode transition in the CZ mode, the type of number character to be displayed, the lottery result of this game, and the lottery result that triggered the AT mode transition winning may be associated. For example, if AT mode transition is won with a specific role as a trigger, odd-numbered characters are likely to be displayed as double eyes effects, and AT mode transition is won with normal roles such as normal reps A to C. In such a case, a character with an even number is likely to be displayed as a double eye effect, and a character with a predetermined number (for example, 0) is likely to be displayed as a double eye effect when the AT mode transition is won with a special role as a trigger. may be In this case, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the current game from the character that stops in the left fluctuation area SP1 at the first stop. It is possible to grasp the degree of expectation for the AT mode shift lottery in relation to the operation mode performed, and it is possible to expect a significant improvement in the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the preliminary determination process at the time of winning the special role, there are cases where AT mode transition winning is won if it is the first operation mode, and AT mode transition winning is not won even if it is the first operation mode, and at the time of the first stop A configuration may be adopted in which the character of the number to be stopped is different. That is, as described above, when the AT mode transition is won with a special role as a trigger, the odd-numbered character is likely to be displayed as a double effect, and when the AT mode transition is won with a special role as a trigger. is configured so that a character with a predetermined number is easily displayed as double eyes effect, and if the AT mode transition is won in the first operation mode, the character with the predetermined number is stopped in the left fluctuation area SP1. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition is not won even in the first operation mode, the configuration may be such that odd-numbered characters are stopped in the left variation area SP1. As described above, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the stop roll when the special combination is won and the stop roll of Cherry A to C among the special combinations are common. Even if AT mode transition winning is not achieved even if an operation is performed in the first operation mode at the time of winning, and even if a character with an odd number stops in the left variation area SP1, cherry A to C is used as a trigger. It is also possible to make the player expect that he or she has won the AT mode shift lottery, and to maintain the expectation for the AT mode shift win.

(13) With regard to the special role and the pushing order bell, which can have the same stop result, the special role is more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than the pushing order bell. A configuration may be adopted in which the order bell is more likely to win the AT mode shift lottery, or even in the second operation mode when the special combination is won, the pushing order bell is more likely to win the AT mode shift lottery.

(14) The preliminary determination process may be performed only during the CZ mode without being performed in the normal mode. In addition, it may be set so that there are cases where preliminary determination processing is performed and cases where it is not performed in the CZ mode, and a configuration in which the CZ mode in which the preliminary determination processing is performed and the CZ mode in which the preliminary determination processing is not performed are determined by lottery or the like when shifting to the CZ mode. may be For example, when the CZ mode is shifted to the CZ mode based on Cherry A, the pre-determination process is performed in the CZ mode, but when the CZ mode is shifted to the CZ mode based on the Cherry B, the pre-determination process is performed in the CZ mode. According to the lottery result that triggered the transition to the CZ mode (the lottery result in the game that won the CZ mode transition), it is decided whether to perform the preliminary determination process during the CZ mode. may be configured. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the player can select in advance whether or not to perform the preliminary determination process.

(15) If it is specified in the preliminary determination process that the AT mode transition wins by operating in the first operation mode when the special role is won, before the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode For example, as the effect at the start, it is possible to notify that the AT mode transition will be won or that there is a high possibility of winning. By doing so, when the notification occurs, it is thought that the player will operate more carefully in the first operation mode, and the joy of confirming the AT mode transition winning by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 by himself. It is possible to make you feel In this case, the AT mode transition win is won in the AT lottery process at the start in the same or similar manner as the notification that the AT mode transition will be won or the notification that there is a high possibility of that. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which notification of the case can be performed.

(16) If it is specified in the preliminary determination process that the AT mode transition wins when the special role is won, a notification (for example, FIG. 70(c)) for selecting the first operation mode and the second operation mode is executed. It is good also as a structure which carries out. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the player wins the AT mode transition winning by his or her own operation in the first operation mode, which can be used to improve the interest in the game. In this case, the first operation mode can be won by making it possible to win the AT mode transition in both the case of operating in the first operation mode and the case of operating in the second operation mode when the special combination is won. To give an impression that winning an AT mode transition is won not only by a selection but also by a selection of a second operation mode, by making it possible to win the AT mode transition winning not only by one's own operation but also by selection. can be done. It should be noted that, in the above configuration, it is preferable that the AT mode transition win is more likely to occur when the operation is performed in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. Furthermore, in this case, the AT mode, which is shifted when operated in the second operation mode, is more advantageous to the player than the AT mode, which is shifted when the operation is performed in the first mode. , the significance of selecting the second operation mode can also be generated, and the interest in the game in which the selection is made can be improved.

(17) Although the navigation mode is configured to be managed on the display control device 81 side, it may be configured to be managed on the main control device 101 side. In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode at the time of winning the special role, the main controller 101 manages the game property of operating in the second operation mode. The navigation mode processing of 75 and the specific notification processing of FIG. In this case, as the specific notification effect, for example, if it is a pressing order bell, it may be configured to execute the pressing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the winning of the first to sixth minor wins. may also be executed.

(18) The trigger for starting and ending the navigation mode is not limited to the above. As a start opportunity, instead of or in addition to the transition to the advantageous section, the case where the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery that is performed at a predetermined opportunity (for example, triggered by a special role) is not won. Okay, start when the number of times the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery is not won reaches a predetermined number, or when the number of games reaches a predetermined number (preferably the number of games before the ceiling) It may be a trigger, and it may be configured to shift to the navigation mode (through a lottery or the like) at some of these start triggers. In addition, instead of or in addition to the AT mode transition, the end trigger may be the end of the advantageous section, or the number of games or the number of occurrences of the specific notification effect after the transition to the navigation mode (special role triggered The number of times the AT mode shift lottery is not won (number of times of non-winning of the AT mode shift lottery) reaches a predetermined number.

(19) Although it is configured so that a specific notification effect can occur by shifting to the navigation mode, if the AT mode is not won even if the special role winning game is operated in the first operation mode, It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the specific notification effect. In this case, for example, even if it is operated in the first operation mode in the previous special role winning game, the AT mode is not won, and even if it is operated in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, the AT mode When it is not won, that is, when AT mode is not won twice in a row triggered by a special role, a specific notification effect is generated. By referring to the result, it may be configured to determine whether or not to generate the specific notification effect at the time of winning the special role of this time. Furthermore, it may be configured to determine whether or not the specific notification effect is generated when the special role is won this time depending on the operation mode when the previous special role was won, for example, in the first operation mode in the previous special role winning game. If the AT mode is not won after the operation, and if the AT mode is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode in the special role winning game this time, a specific notification effect is generated, while the special role winning last time is generated. If the AT mode is not won after operating in the second operation mode in the game, and if the AT mode is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, a specific notification effect will be performed. It may be configured not to generate it.

(20) Switching to Navi Mode Although there is a set difference in the odds of winning the lottery, it is also possible to switch to navi mode with a uniform probability regardless of the set value. Also, the probability of winning the transition may be different depending on the lottery result of the game in which the navigation mode transition lottery is performed. The navigation mode transition lottery may be more likely to win the navigation mode transition lottery, or vice versa.

(21) In the navigation mode, if a special role is won and the AT mode transition lottery is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, a specific notification effect is performed, but the specific notification is not notified. In place of or in addition to the production, a production to the effect that the operation is performed in the second operation mode (for example, in the case of a push order bell, a push order notification production for the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes) is performed. may be configured. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific notification effect is performed and the effect of performing the operation in the second operation mode is mixed. For example, these effects may be alternately executed. , may be configured to determine by lottery which production is to be executed.

(22) Execute processing related to the instruction function according to the operation mode in the special role winning game, such as AT lottery processing at stop time and additional lottery processing at stop time, after the medal payout of the game is completed. However, it may be after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, may be before the start of medal payout, or may be after the start of medal payout but before completion. good.

(23) In the special role winning game, after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, a freeze effect may be generated. In this case, before the start of the freeze effect or during the freeze effect, processing related to the instruction function according to the operation mode in the special role winning game, such as AT lottery processing at stop time and extra lottery processing at stop time, is executed. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Then, during the freeze effect or in the freeze effect, the results of the AT lottery process at the time of stop and the additional lottery process at the time of stop may be notified.

(24) When the push order bell is won outside of the AT mode, the instruction monitor 68 is configured to execute the push order bell group notification. may not be executed. Also, when the pressing order bell is won, the lottery result command for the pressing order bell group is output. It is good also as the structure which does not carry out. At least, it is sufficient that the display control device 81 cannot identify the advantageous operation sequence (operation sequence corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning combinations) when the bell is won by pressing the order bell, except in the AT mode.

(25) In the case where the pressing order bell group is won, the lottery result command for the pressing order bell group is output. good too. That is, the lottery results are grouped into specific roles, special roles, and other normal roles (normal bells A to C, pushing order bells), and these special role lottery result commands and special role lottery result commands are issued. A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery result command for a normal combination is output to the display control device 81 .

(26) In the special role winning game before shifting to the AT mode, the instruction monitor 68 was configured to notify the player of the special role. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Specifically, for example, in place of or in addition to the configuration for executing "9" as the notification of the special role as in the above-described embodiment, the pressing order bell is used as the operation order for first operating the left stop switch 42. If there is, it may be configured to display "1" or "2" indicating the operation order corresponding to the first minor winning prize or the second minor winning prize. The same applies to special role A notification, special role B notification, and special role C notification. ' or '2' may be displayed, and '3' or '4' indicating the operation order corresponding to the third or fourth minor winning combination may be displayed when the special winning combination B is notified. It may be configured to display "5" or "6" indicating the operation order corresponding to the fifth minor winning prize or the sixth minor winning prize when the special prize C is notified. However, in the case of these special roles A to C, it is preferable to control the instruction monitor 68 so that the pressing order notification corresponding to the same operation order as the pressing order notification effect displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed.

(27) When the special combination is won before shifting to the AT mode, when the display control device 81 executes the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first operation mode, the pressing order notification effect is made distinguishable from the case of the pressing order bell. However, the pressing order notification effect may be performed in the same notification mode as the pressing order bell, or the pressing order notification effect may be performed in the same reporting mode as the pressing order bell and in a different reporting mode from the pressing order bell. There may be cases where a performance is performed.

(28) When the pressing order bell is won in the AT mode, the main control unit 101 sends the display control unit 81 a pressing order notification command indicating the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning combinations as the pressing order notification command. However, the configuration may be such that the commands corresponding to the first to sixth minor wins are output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. FIG. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a command indicating which of the pressing order bells is the lottery result is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 . In these cases, in order to operate in the second operation mode when winning a special role and to establish the 1st to 6th minor wins, the corresponding command (1st to 6th minor wins It is preferable that the main control device 101 outputs to the display control device 81 the corresponding command and the command indicating the result of the pressing order bell corresponding to the first to sixth minor wins to be won. 23 may be stored in the display control device 81 so that the order of operations to be notified can be specified based on the received command.

(29) When the number of ceiling games on the display is reached, the precursor effect is determined according to the difference until the ceiling counter reaches 0, but the precursor effect is determined after the ceiling counter reaches 0. may be configured.

(30) In a configuration in which an omen effect is determined according to the deviation until the ceiling counter reaches 0 when the ceiling game number on the display is reached, the deviation reaches the number of games of the omen effect provided in advance. A configuration may be adopted in which an omen effect is set in the case. That is, in the above-described embodiment, the maximum number of games that can be played in the omen mode during normal operation is 40 games. When the number of games on the display reaches the ceiling, an omen effect is set, and if the deviation is more than 40 games, the omen effect is set when the games are completed until the deviation is within 40 games. good too. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the number of precursor effect patterns to be stored.

(31) The ceiling number of games on the display is configured to be updated regardless of the operation mode when the special role is won, but it may be configured so that it may or may not be updated depending on the operation mode. update is performed in some cases where the ceiling counter is not decremented by the second operation mode, and updating is performed even when the ceiling counter is not decremented by the second operation mode. You can let it be. Even in these cases, considering the case where a value greater than 1 is subtracted from the ceiling counter by the subtraction value lottery process, the ceiling counter becomes 0 in games where the number of displayed ceiling games reaches the ceiling. A gap may occur with the game.

(32) Even in games other than special combinations, the ceiling counter may not be decremented depending on the operation mode or by lottery.

(33) Although the number of ceiling games is determined by lottery at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the number of ceiling games may be set as a uniform number of games (for example, 700 games).

(34) The advantageous zone transition lottery is configured to be performed after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and the winning probability of the advantageous zone transition lottery is changed according to the operation mode in the special role winning game. , The winning probability of the advantageous zone transition lottery is set to be the same (same processing) regardless of the operation mode in the special role winning game, simply by performing the advantageous zone transition lottery after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed. may be In this case, when a special role is won in the normal section, the supplementary display section 65 or the like may notify the effect so that the player can grasp that the special role has been won. By doing so, even in a scene where common processing is actually performed regardless of the operation mode of winning a special role, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the operation mode, which complicates the processing configuration. It is possible to improve interest while preventing the occurrence of Even with such a configuration, if the advantageous section transition lottery is performed regardless of the operation mode when the special role is won, it is more advantageous to operate in the second operation mode when the special role is won in the normal section. Intervals and advantageous modes of operation are reversed. By the way, as described above, the effect of notifying the special role in the scene where the common processing is performed regardless of the operation mode of winning the special role can be expected even in the AT mode. A special role winning game may be configured to notify that the special role has been won.

(35) When a plurality of special roles are provided, the number of types of special roles is not limited to three, and may be two, four or more. In this case, the first operation mode in one special role becomes the second operation mode in another special role, and the first operation mode in the other special role becomes the second operation mode in one special role. When a game in which one special role is continuously operated in the first operation mode is performed, the other special role is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation mode and the second operation mode are performed. You can expect the effect of making it operate evenly.

(36) In a configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, a first privilege is provided when one special role is operated in the first operation mode, and a first benefit is provided when the second operation mode is operated. The second privilege is different from the first privilege that is granted when the other special role is operated in the first operation mode and the second privilege that is granted when the other special role is operated in the second operation mode. may In this case, while the first benefits are different, the second benefits are the same, while the first benefits are the same, the second benefits are different, the first benefits are different, and the second benefits are different. may have different configurations. In addition, in a configuration in which three or more types of special roles are provided, not only are the first and second benefits different, but the first benefits for the first special role and the second special role are the same. On the other hand, while the benefits of some special roles are the same, such as that the first privilege for the third special role is different from that of the first special role and the second special role, other special roles The relationship may be different from the privilege of the role. In these cases, while the first privilege and the second privilege are different from other special roles, the difference in the degree of advantage (for example, the number of medals paid out) between the first privilege and the second privilege may be common.

(37) In a configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, a first process relating to an instruction function is executed when one special role is operated in the first operation mode, and when the special role is operated in the second operation mode, The second processing related to the instruction function to be executed includes the first processing related to the instruction function to be executed when the other special role is operated in the first operation mode, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. It may be different from the second processing regarding the instruction function to be performed. In this case, while the first processes are different, the second processes are the same, while the first processes are the same, the second processes are different, or the first processes and the second processes are different. may have different configurations. In addition, in a configuration in which three or more types of special roles are provided, not only are the respective first processing and second processing different, but also the first processing for the first special role and the second special role are the same. On the other hand, the first processing for the third special role is different from that for the first special role and the second special role. The relationship may be different from the process of winning. In these cases, while the first process and the second process are different from other special roles, the difference between the first process and the second process (for example, the probability of winning in AT mode) is common. good.

(38) As a special role, when operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is given and the first process related to the instruction function is executed, and in the second operation mode different from the first operation mode. When operated, the second privilege, which is more advantageous than the first privilege, is granted, and the second processing, which is processing related to the instruction function and is more disadvantageous than the first processing, is executed. In addition to the mode and the second operation mode, when the operation is performed in the third operation mode different from the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the third privilege is granted and the third process related to the instruction function is performed. A special role may be provided. In this case, the third privilege may have a configuration different from both the first privilege and the second privilege, a configuration that is different from the first privilege but the same as the second privilege, or a configuration that is the same as the first privilege. On the other hand, it may be configured differently from the second privilege, the third process may be configured differently from the first process and the second process, and the third process may be different from the first process but the same as the second process. or a configuration that is the same as the first process but different from the second process. In any case, the set of the third privilege and the third process may be configured so as not to have the same content as the set of the first privilege and the first process and the set of the second privilege and the second process. Some contents may be the same. In addition, the third benefit is different from the first and second benefits, and the third processing is different from the first and second processing, thereby giving different advantages to the player. The benefit obtained from the set of the third privilege and the third processing is different from the benefit obtained from the set of the first privilege and the first processing, and the set of the second privilege and the second processing It is better to have a configuration different from the benefit obtained in

More specifically, for example, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor win is established and one medal is paid out, and as the first process, the AT mode shift win is won with a probability of 50%. The AT mode transition lottery is executed, and when operated in the second operation mode, the first to sixth minor winning prizes are established and 8 medals are paid out, and 0% as the second process. In the configuration in which an AT mode transition lottery is executed in which the AT mode transition is won with a probability of , when the operation is performed in the third operation mode, the 7th or 8th minor winning combination is established and three medals are awarded. A payout may occur, and as the third process, an AT mode transition lottery may be executed with a 25% probability of winning the AT mode transition.

(39) When the special combination is won, the first operation mode and the second operation mode make it possible to achieve different small winnings depending on whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode. When operated in the second operation mode, a predetermined replay winning prize is established, and when operated in the second operation mode, a predetermined minor winning prize is established, or when operated in the first operation mode In this case, a predetermined minor winning prize is established, while a predetermined replay winning prize is established when operated in the second operation mode, or a predetermined replay prize is established when operated in the first operation mode. While a minor win is established, a predetermined bonus prize is established when operated in the second operation mode, and no winning is established as a result of operation in the first operation mode. Alternatively, when operated in the second operation mode, a predetermined small winning combination, replay, or bonus winning may be established.

(40) When the special role is won, the processing related to the instruction function is executed after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed. A configuration may be adopted in which the processing relating to the instruction function is executed after completion.

For example, in the AT lottery process at the start of winning a special role, if the first lottery of the AT mode transition lottery is performed and the first lottery is won, and the operation is performed in the first operation mode, While confirming the transition to the AT mode by setting the AT mode winning flag in the AT lottery process at the time of stop, if the first lottery at the start is not won, operate in the first operation mode. Even if the AT mode winning flag is not set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop, and if the first lottery at the start is won, the operation is performed in the second operation mode. Even if the AT mode winning flag is not set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop, and if the first lottery at the start is not won, the operation is performed in the second operation mode. However, the configuration may be such that the AT mode winning flag is not set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop.

Furthermore, in the AT lottery process at the start of winning a special role, the first lottery of the AT mode transition lottery is performed, and the result of the first lottery is the first result, and in the first operation mode When it is operated, the AT mode winning flag is set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop, while the transition to the AT mode is confirmed. If it is the result, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the AT lottery process at stop even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, and the result of the first lottery at the start is the first lottery. If the result is 2, if the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed by setting the AT mode winning flag in the AT lottery process at the time of stop. When the result of the first lottery is the second result, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode. may be

(41) In the configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, the winning probability of each special role in each game is the same, but the winning probability may be different. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which special roles A to C are provided, the odds of winning special roles A and B are the same, but the odds of winning special role C are different. may be different, or the winning probabilities of any of the special roles A to C may be different from each other.

(42) The odds of winning a special role may differ according to the game state. For example, when shifting to the RT state in which the probability of winning a replay increases, the probability of winning a special role changes (increases or decreases) compared to the normal state before transition. In addition, in the configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, the probability of winning the special role A is higher than that of the special role B in the first state, while the probability of winning the special role B is lower than that of the special role A. In the second state, the probability of winning the special role B is lower than that of the special role A. The winning probability of B is higher than that of the special role A, while the winning probability of the special role A is lower than that of the special role B, and so on.

(43) Even in the configuration in which a plurality of special combinations are provided, the first operation mode and the second operation mode may be distinguished not only by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 but also by the operation timing.

(44) Execute the AT lottery based on the special combination after operating the stop switches 42 to 44 (AT lottery process at stop time, etc.), and perform the AT lottery based on other results by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. Although it is configured to be executed before (at the time of operating the start lever 41, AT lottery process at the start, etc.), even if the result is other than a special role, after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (at the time of stop AT lottery process ), or even in the case of a special role, the AT lottery may be executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (process for AT lottery at start). Even in these cases, for example, the effect control as notification of the result of the AT lottery in the CZ mode is based on the AT lottery after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (CZ effect setting process at the time of stop) and before the operation. A configuration different from that based on the AT lottery (starting CZ effect setting process) may be used.

(45) The net increase in the number of medals per game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state is set to about plus 0.00, and the medals in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state do not increase or decrease. A configuration in which the number of medals can be increased or a configuration in which the number of medals can be decreased may be used. In this case, it is sufficient that the net increase number in the first BB state and the second BB state is at least greater than the net increase number in the case of playing the internal state or the non-internal state in the 3-bet game.

(46) Execution of each process related to the instruction function is allowed by the player playing the internal state or non-internal state in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, or establishing a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win. Although it is configured to shift from the state of being restricted to the state of being restricted, the gaming machine is configured to shift from the state of allowing the execution of each process related to the instruction function to the state of being restricted by, for example, completing a predetermined number of games. may be

(47) The ball payout rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 has the highest ball payout rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(48) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(49) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

(50) In the above embodiment, a game machine can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
with
The specific processing means executes a first specific process as the specific process when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is executed. is set not to run
In the special game, at a certain timing after the operation of the stop operation means is executed, a specific notification means capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the specific process (CZ effect setting at the time of stop by the display control device 81 A game machine characterized by having a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided, and as a specific process related to the mode notification function While the first specifying process is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given, and the second specifying process is executed as the specifying process related to the mode notification function. A special result is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, the first specific process is more advantageous to the player than the second specific process, so the special result In this case, it is novel that the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the mode notification function (first operation mode). It is possible to realize a great playability.

Moreover, in the above configuration, in a game in which a special result with a different privilege or specific process is won by such an operation mode, after the operation of the stop operation means is executed, the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is performed. can be executed, the result of the specific processing based on the special result is notified within the game in which the special result is won. Therefore, even in a so-called complete announcement type gaming machine that notifies the result of specific processing in each game, it is possible to set a special result, which can be greatly used to enhance the interest of the game.

Feature A2. The specific processing means is
a means capable of executing, as the specific process, a process for causing a specific event (AT mode transition win, CZ mode shift, AT add-on win, ceiling counter subtraction) to facilitate execution of mode notification by the mode notification means; ,
is set such that the specific event is more likely to occur when the first specific process is executed than when the second specific process is executed,
The specific notification means executes the specific notification as notification corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event,
If the result of the specific processing by the specific processing means is a response result (AT mode transition winning, CZ mode transition winning) corresponding to causing the specific event, a specific event control means (main A process for setting the precursor mode by the control device 101),
When the result of the specific process triggered by the special result is the corresponding result, the specific event control means causes the specific event to occur in the game subsequent to the special game in which the special result is obtained. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it has a means (a function of executing a process of setting the number of precursor games by the main control device 101 to 0).

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the first specific processing is executed in which the specific event is more likely to occur if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, and the specific event is more likely to occur if the operation is performed in the second operation mode than in the first operation mode. In the configuration in which the second specific process, which is unlikely to occur, is executed, the specific notification corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event is executed in the game with the special result. In addition, since a specific event occurs in the game following the special game that resulted in the special result, a specific notification corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event is executed in the game that resulted in the occurrence of the specific event. The need to do so is heightened. By doing so, even if the specific process is executed after the operation of the stop operation means is performed and the specific event can occur in the next game, it is known that the specific event will occur. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a specific event without being notified, and it is possible to suppress the surprise of the specific event, and the period in which the specific notification can be executed is more limited, so that the player's awareness is increased during the period. It is possible to concentrate and raise the degree of attention to the game to the utmost.

Feature A3. When the specific event has occurred by the specific event control means, the game (AT mode) after the game in which the specific event has occurred is faster than the game (CZ mode, normal mode) before the specific event has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that the game is highly advantageous for the player.

According to the above configuration, since the special game in which the result of the specific processing triggered by the special result becomes the corresponding result, the advantage for the player increases, so the necessity of performing the specific notification in the special game is high. Become. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature A1 in such a situation, it can be expected that the excellent effect of the feature A1 can be exhibited more favorably.

In addition, regarding the expression ``high advantage for the player'', the expression ``the unit expected privilege (net increase in the number of sheets) that can be expected per game as a privilege granted by the privilege granting means is large''. Alternatively, it may be expressed as ``the result of the specific processing is likely to be an advantageous result for the player''.

Feature A4. Based on the result of the specific processing by the specific processing means, the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means after the game next to the special game is higher than the execution frequency in the game up to the special game. The game according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized by comprising means (function for executing processing for shifting to AT mode by main control device 101) capable of making machine.

According to the above configuration, based on the result of the specific process triggered by the special result, the execution frequency of mode notification increases in the game subsequent to the special game resulting in the special result. Therefore, the player can establish a desired winning result by following the mode notification, and can efficiently obtain a privilege based on the desired winning result. Further, since the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing is performed in the special game, the fact is informed by the specific notification at least before the execution frequency of the mode notification becomes high. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling discomfort.

Feature A5. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result can be established, while the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. When operated in a second operation mode different from , a mode in which a winning of a second result can be established in which a privilege given by the privilege granting means is different from that when winning of the first result is established. The result (push order bell) is set,
The mode notification means is configured to be capable of executing an operation mode including the first operation mode and the second operation mode as the mode notification based on the operation of the starting operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4.

According to the above configuration, when the game next to the special game that won the special result wins the mode result, and the mode notification is performed based on the mode result, at least the result of the specific process triggered by the special result is supported. If the specific notification to be executed is executed within the special game, the mode notification and the specific notification which are executed at the start of the game in which the mode result is won are less likely to overlap. By doing so, it is possible to avoid confusing the player due to duplicate notifications.

In particular, as in the feature A4, in the configuration in which the execution frequency of the mode notification increases from the game following the special game, the mode notification is performed at the start of the game following the game in which the special result is won as described above. There is a high possibility of being caught, and the significance of executing the specific notification in the special game is high.

Feature A6. In a game in which a lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a specific combination) different from the special result, the specific processing means performs a third specific process before the stop operation means is operated. Equipped with means capable of executing specific processing (function for executing AT lottery processing at the time of start by main control device 101, etc.),
In a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the specified result, a second specific notification means capable of executing notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process at least by the specific timing (at the start of the display control device 81) A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized by comprising a function of executing a CZ effect setting process.

According to the above configuration, in a game that is a specific result, the third specific process is performed before the operation of the stop operation means. can be easily done. In other words, it can be said that the specific notification is set to be executed at a specific timing in accordance with the notification in the case of the specific result. It is possible to avoid giving a sense of incongruity due to the difference in notification timing of the result, and it is also possible to eliminate the possibility that the result of the specific process is seen through due to the difference in the notification timing.

In relation to the "second specific notification means", the "specific notification means" in feature A1 may be replaced with the "first specific notification means".

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the second specific notification means can execute notification (tenpai effect) corresponding to the result of the third specific processing at a timing prior to the specific timing.

According to the above configuration, in the game as the specific result, the third specific process is performed before the operation of the stop operation means, and the notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process is executed at the timing before the specific timing. be. That is, when the first specific process or the second specific process is executed as the specific process, it is assumed that the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is executed at a specific timing after the stop operation means is operated. When the specific result is won, the notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process as the specific process is executed before the specific timing. By doing so, the timing of executing the notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing is diversified, and the result of the specific processing is predicted based on the relationship between the lottery result and the timing of notification that triggers the specific processing. A game can also be realized, and it is possible to contribute to improving the interest of the game.

Feature A8. The specific processing means is
a means capable of executing, as the specific process, a process for causing a specific event (AT mode transition win, CZ mode shift, AT add-on win, ceiling counter subtraction) to facilitate execution of mode notification by the mode notification means; ,
The specific process in the case of the special result is set so that the specific event is more likely to occur than the specific process in the case of the predetermined specific result (for example, Cherry A). The gaming machine according to feature A6 or feature A7.

According to the above configuration, the case where the specific process such as the first specific process or the second specific process is performed based on the special result is better than the case where the specific process such as the third specific process is performed based on the specific result. specific events are likely to occur. Therefore, the notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing is overwhelmingly easier to execute in the game in which the specific result is won, but the notification that it leads to the specific event desired by the player is special. As a result, the winning game is more likely to occur. Therefore, even if it is a special result, the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is executed within the game in which the specific process is performed, so that even the game that is the specific result can correspond to the result of the specific process. It is possible to make people have a sense of expectation for the notification to be made.

Feature A9. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result is higher than the probability that it will be the other specific result (normal reply A to C, chance A to C, cherry A to C, watermelon) The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8, characterized in that it is set to .

According to the above configuration, the appearance rate of a special result is lower than that of other specific results. In the case of the result, inconvenience such as not being notified of the specific processing after it is executed is likely to occur. In that respect, by notifying the result of the specific process in accordance with the other specific results, it is possible to hide the fact that it is a special result in the other specific results, and it is possible to correspond to the result of the specific process from the notification timing. It is possible to prevent the content of the notification from being overlooked, and to favorably increase the degree of attention to the notification.

Feature A10. In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a specific combination) different from the special result, the specific processing means performs a third specific process before the stop operation means is operated. Equipped with means capable of executing specific processing (function for executing AT lottery processing at the time of start by main control device 101, etc.),
Execution of the first specific process triggered by the special result is set to be more advantageous to the player than execution of the third specific process triggered by the predetermined specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, by operating in the first operation mode when the special result is won, the first specified process is performed which is more advantageous than the third specified process which is executed regardless of the operation mode when the other specific result is won. will be With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more cautiously perform the operation mode when the special result is won, and to make the player want to know the result of the first specific processing based on the operation more quickly. , the significance of performing the specific notification in the special game resulting in the special result like the feature A1 is enhanced.

Feature A11. In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a specific combination) different from the special result, the specific processing means performs a third specific process before the stop operation means is operated. Equipped with means capable of executing specific processing (function for executing AT lottery processing at the time of start by main control device 101, etc.),
It is set so that it is more advantageous for the player to execute the third specific process triggered by the predetermined specific result than to execute the second specific process triggered by the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, if an operation is performed in the second operation mode when the special result is won, the second specified process is performed which is more disadvantageous than the third specified process which is executed regardless of the operation mode when the other specific result is won. done. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the operation mode more careful when winning a special result. Especially from the relationship with the feature A10, it is possible to make the user want to know the result of the second specific processing based on the operation at an early stage. The meaning of doing is enhanced.

Feature A12. Preliminary notification means (tenpai effect, confirmation effect, specific notification effect) corresponding to the result of the specific process (Tenpai effect, specific effect, special role in the start time CZ effect setting process by the display control device 81) A function to execute processing for performing notification production and a function to execute processing for performing confirmation production when cherry winning is performed),
The preceding notification means is a means capable of executing the preceding notification at a timing prior to the specific timing in the special game (a tenpai effect triggered by a special role in the start CZ effect setting process by the display control device 81). and a function of executing a process for performing a specific notification effect).

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the specific process differs depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the destination corresponding to the specific process at a timing prior to the specific timing at which the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is performed. Since the notification may be performed, the player can perceive in advance that the specific notification will be performed, and even if the notification timing is limited, the period of the specific notification can be secured for a longer period of time, and the game performance can be optimized.

Feature A13. According to the result of the specific processing, the specific notification means may provide content notification including advantageous content that is advantageous to the player or non-advantageous content that is more disadvantageous to the player than when the advantageous content is performed. can be executed as the specific notification,
The specific notification of the advantageous content may be performed after the prior notification is performed by the prior notification means, and the non-advantageous content may be performed after the prior notification is performed by the prior notification means. It is set so that a specific notification may be made,
Furthermore, after the prior notification is performed by the prior notification means, the specific notification of the advantageous content is more likely to be performed than the specific notification of the unadvantageous content. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, even in the case where advance notification is performed before execution of the specific processing, the subsequent specific notification may have advantageous contents or may have unfavorable contents. Even if it is done, it becomes difficult for a contradiction to occur in the subsequent specific notification. In addition, when the advance notification is performed, the contents are likely to be advantageous, so it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the advance notification.

Feature A14. After the branch timing (first stop ON operation) in which the operation mode of each of the stop operation means is performed to determine which operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the previous notification means The gaming machine according to feature A12 or feature A13, characterized by comprising means for performing the preceding notification (function for executing processing for performing a ten-pie effect by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it becomes impossible for the player to decide in which operation mode to operate according to the advance notification by the advance notification means. That is, for example, if the content of the specific notification can be detected in advance, and if the detected content is not desirable for the player, the second operation is performed so as to obtain the second privilege although the second specific processing is performed. Although it is conceivable to operate in different modes, by causing the previous notification to occur after the timing at which the first operation mode and the second operation mode diverge, as described above, the above actions are less likely to be performed.

Feature A15. Prior to the branch timing (first stop ON operation) when the operation of each of the stop operation means is performed to determine which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is to be performed. Any one of features A12 to A14 characterized by comprising means for performing the preceding notification by means (function for executing processing for performing specific notification effect by display control device 81) The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the player can decide which operation mode to operate in accordance with the advance notification by the advance notification means. That is, for example, if the content of the specific notification can be detected in advance, and if the detected content is not desirable for the player, the second operation is performed so as to obtain the second privilege although the second specific processing is performed. It is also conceivable that the player operates the stop operation means more carefully if the sensed content is favorable to the player. By generating it before the timing of branching to the second operation mode, it is possible to determine which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode should be operated by prior notification, and then efficiently acquire the privilege. It is possible to realize a novel game property such as this, and it is also possible to greatly enhance the performance toward the specific notification.

Feature A16. In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result different from the special result, a second advance notification means (display control device 81 The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A15, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of performing a tenpai effect or a specific notification effect when a special role is not won.

According to the above configuration, since the previous notification is generated even if it is another specific result, the previous notification is less likely to serve as a mark of the special result. Therefore, it becomes difficult to predict the game result from the content of the notification, and it is possible to enjoy the notification more purely.

Feature A17. The specific processing means is configured to execute the specific process using specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number) acquired before executing the specific process,
The result of the specific process when the specific numerical information is used for the specific process can be specified before the specific process is performed. function),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A16, wherein the advance notification is executed based on the identification result of the destination identification means.

According to the above configuration, even if a special result is processed differently depending on the operation mode, the result of the first specific process when the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second specific process when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. Since the result of the specific process can be specified in advance and the advance notification is performed based on the result specified in advance, the reliability of the advance notification can be improved.

Feature A18. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a specific symbol is placed at a specific position of a specific loop (left reel 32L) among the loops. stops and the first pattern combination stops at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (Cherry A to C) different from the special result, the specific pattern stops at a specific position of the specific circular body, and the first pattern is displayed at the valid position. By stopping the third pattern combination different from the combination and the second pattern combination, the privilege corresponding to the specified result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The preceding notification means is a specific means capable of executing the preceding notification in a situation where the specific pattern has stopped at a specific position of the specific rotating body and other rotating bodies have not stopped (cherry winning by the display control device 81). A gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A17, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process for performing a time fixed effect.

When a specific pattern stops at a specific position of a specific loop, it is possible to determine from the stop result whether it is based on a specific result or by the first operation mode when winning a special role result. Can not. In such a configuration, when the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific loop, there is a case where the previous notification is performed. or whether it corresponds to the first specific processing or the second specific processing after that, and there are more choices in predicting the result when the previous notification is performed. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of the notification and the specific notification.

Feature A19. The specific processing means is means (main control unit) capable of executing a third specific process as the specific process before the stop operation means is operated in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result. A function to execute AT lottery processing etc. at the start by the device 101),
The gaming machine according to feature A18, wherein the identifying means executes notification corresponding to the result of the third identifying process based on the identification result as the previous notification.

According to the above configuration, the third specific process is performed before the stop operation, and the notification corresponding to the result is executed as the previous notification when the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific rotating body. By doing so, if the scene in which the advance notification is performed is a special result, the situation is still the same as the stop result before the execution of the specific process, but there is no contradiction in the content of the advance notification. , it is possible to improve the reliability of the earlier notification.

Feature A20. Characteristic feature A18 characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the second pattern combination stops at the effective position without the specific pattern stopping at the specific position of the specific circular body. Or the gaming machine according to feature A19.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific orbiting body when operated in the first operation mode, but the specific pattern stops when operated in the second operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to strongly give the impression that the previous notification was executed as a result of the selection of the operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the previous notification.

It should be noted that the above configuration is defined as "a branch timing (first stop ON operation) to determine which operation mode to be performed between the first operation mode and the second operation mode when each of the stop operation means is operated. is set, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the specific pattern is stopped at the specific position of the specific circular body at the branch timing by operating in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result, by operating in the second operation mode, the specific pattern does not stop at the specific position of the specific circular body at the branch timing. By limiting the configuration of "other symbols stop", it becomes clearer that whether or not the specific symbol stops at the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode is different.

Feature A21. A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the number of each of the revolving bodies,
The specific processing means executes the first specific process or the second specific process after all the stop operation means are operated,
Any one of features A1 to A20, characterized in that the specific notification means executes the specific notification after the first specific process or the second specific process is executed in the special game. game machine.

According to the above configuration, after all the operations of the plurality of stop operation means are completed, the first specifying process and the second specifying process are executed, and the specified notification is performed. By adopting such a configuration, a more careful operation of the stop operation means at the time of winning the special result is encouraged, and the timing of performing the specific notification within the special game in which the special result is won is more limited. It becomes a thing. As a result, the timing at which attention should be paid to the specific notification is aggregated, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the specific notification.

Feature A22. Characteristic A1 to Characteristic A21 characterized in that the specific notification means executes the specific notification before the start of the game next to the special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the specific notification is executed in the special game in which the special result is won, and the specific notification is not carried over to the next game. With such a configuration, the specific timing at which the specific notification is performed is further limited, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the specific notification.

The inventions described in the features A1 to A22 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features A1 to A22, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by means of a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing a push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main controller 101); ,
Advantage determination means (for example, a function of executing an AT lottery process at the time of start or an AT lottery process at the time of stop by the main controller 101) for executing an advantage determination that causes an advantageous event advantageous to the player;
Specific notification means (function for executing CZ effect setting processing at start and CZ effect setting processing at stop by display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination by predetermined notification means;
with
The advantageous determination means is
a first advantage judgment means (a function of executing AT lottery processing at the start by the main controller 101) for executing a first advantage judgment as the advantage judgment when the starting operation means is operated;
a second advantage judgment means (a function of executing a stop AT lottery process by the main controller 101) for executing a second advantage judgment as the advantage judgment after the stop operation means is operated;
with
The specific notification means is
A first specific notification (tenpai effect based on a specific combination) corresponding to the result of the first advantageous determination is executed as the specific notification at a specific timing before the predetermined stop operation means is operated. 1 specific notification means (function for executing start time CZ effect setting processing by display control device 81);
A second specific notification means (a CZ effect at the time of stop by the display control device 81) capable of executing a second specific notification (tenpai effect based on a special role) corresponding to the result of the second advantageous determination at the specific timing as the specific notification function to execute setting processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided, while the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. A special result is set in which the second privilege is given when the operation is performed in , and there are cases where the mode notification of the operation mode including the first operation mode and the second operation mode is performed. It is possible to realize a game property such that even if the result is the same, different benefits can be obtained depending on the presence or absence of the device.

In this way, even though it is premised on the game property that the privilege obtained by operating the stop operation means may differ, the advantage determination that causes an advantageous event for the player is the start operation means before the operation of the stop operation means. or after the operation of the stop operation means. Advantageous judgments before and after the operation can be included in the gameplay, and the game is diversified.

After that, while the first specific notification corresponding to the result of the first advantageous determination before the operation of the stop operation means is performed at a specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means, after the operation of the stop operation means Since the second specific notification corresponding to the result of the second advantageous determination is also performed at a specific timing, it does not matter whether the executed specific notification corresponds to either the first advantageous determination or the second advantageous determination. It becomes difficult to distinguish whether or not, even if it is the second specific notification before the execution of the advantageous determination, the first specific notification after the execution of the advantageous determination can increase the reliability of the second specific notification, and the Attention to the specific notification can be improved.

Feature B2. A specific number of the stop operation means is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the second advantage determination means executes the second advantage determination after the specific number of stop operation means are operated.

According to the above configuration, the second advantage judgment is executed after all stop operation means are operated. By doing so, it is clarified that the specific timing, which is the timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means, is the timing before the operation of all the stop operation means is completed. Therefore, it is also clarified that the second specific notification is prior notification before execution of the second advantageous determination, and the effect of feature B1 that enhances the reliability of such advance notification using the first specific notification is also highlighted. be able to.

Feature B3. The second specific notification means, before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means (stop switch corresponding to the third reel) and after the operation of the specific stop operation means (stop switch corresponding to the first reel) The game according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized by comprising means capable of executing the second specific notification at specific timing (a function of executing processing for performing a tenpai effect by the display control device 81). machine.

According to the above configuration, the second specific notification is executed after at least the operation of the specific stop operation means is performed. In a configuration in which the results are different, it is possible to perform the second specific notification after narrowing down to some extent. Therefore, the reliability of the second specific notification itself can be enhanced.

Feature B4. The second specific notification means executes the second specific notification when the specific stop operation means is operated in a first mode (first stop and predetermined location), When the stop operation means is operated in a second mode (second or third stop, or first stop and other than the predetermined location) different from the first mode, the second specific notification is not executed. The game machine according to feature B3, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the first stop ON effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of performing the above.

According to the above configuration, the second advantage judgment executed after the operation of the stop operation means gives the player a different impression depending on whether the specific stop operation means is operated in the first mode or in the second mode. It is possible to operate the stop operation means more carefully and with expectation through the second specific notification.

Feature B5. The second advantage determination means can execute the second advantage determination when the specific stop operation means is operated in the first mode when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result. , and the second advantageous determination may not be executed when the specific stop operation means is operated in the second mode. game machine.

According to the above configuration, consistency is ensured that the presence or absence of execution of the second specific notification differs depending on the operation mode as in feature B4. Therefore, the reliability of the specific notification is enhanced, and it becomes possible to draw attention to the specific notification.

Feature B6. In each game, when the advantageous determination is performed or when the advantageous determination is performed, the predetermined notification means is caused to start predetermined notification, and the result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination is made. a predetermined notification means for ending the predetermined notification (function for executing variable display by numerical characters in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 by the display control device 81),
The first specific notification means executes the first specific notification at the specific timing in the predetermined notification, and then the result notification corresponding to the result of the first advantageous determination is performed by the predetermined notification means. Execute the predetermined notification,
The second specific notification means executes the second specific notification at the specific timing in the predetermined notification, and then performs the result notification corresponding to the result of the second advantageous determination by the predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein the predetermined notification is executed.

According to the above configuration, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are effects in the middle of the predetermined notification, and after each specific notification is performed, the result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination is performed. become. By doing so, even if the second specific notification is performed before the second advantageous determination is performed, the notification content of the second specific notification is compensated by performing the result notification after that. It is also possible to make In other words, the second specific notification can be treated as advance notification, and the degree of freedom in the content of the second specific notification is greatly improved.

Feature B7. A normal state (normal section) and an advantageous state (advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set,
When a predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, termination means for terminating the advantageous state (advantageous section based on reaching the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number in the section display second process by the main controller 101) function to execute termination processing) and
Specifying means (display A function of executing a process for performing a pressing order notification effect for the 1st to 6th small roles instead of a specific notification effect during AT when a special role is won by the control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to signal that the upper limit of the advantageous state is reached by performing the second specific notification in advance corresponding to the second advantageous determination performed after the operation of the stop operation means. By doing so, it is possible to make the second specific notification not only a function of notifying the second advantageous determination in advance, but also a function of notifying that the upper limit of the advantageous state is reached, It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the second specific notification through the integration of functions.

Feature B8. The second specific notification means can execute the second specific notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result,
The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein the second specific notification includes notification of content corresponding to the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific notification is performed in a situation where it is specified that the upper limit of the advantageous state is reached, the second operation mode is shown in which the second privilege is granted. By doing so, the player can obtain more benefits when the advantageous state ends, and the number of benefits that can be obtained in the advantageous state is limited. In the configuration, it is possible to reach the upper limit earlier.

In addition, the inventions described in the features B1 to B8 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features B1 to B8, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by means of a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main controller 101);
Specific determination means for executing a specific determination to cause a specific event that facilitates the execution of mode notification by the mode notification means (for example, AT lottery processing at the time of start by the main controller 101, AT lottery processing at the time of stop, etc. a function to execute processing related to the instruction function);
with
The specific determination means is
In the special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first specific determination is executed as the specific determination, while the stop operation is performed. When the means is operated in the second operation mode, as the specific determination, the second specific determination that the specific event is less likely to occur than the first specific determination is performed, or the specific determination is set not to be performed. has been
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result is given after the game in the special game. Executable specific notification means (processing for outputting a precursor command based on the delay flag by the main control device 101, and performing double eyes production based on the precursor command in the start CZ production setting processing by the display control device 81 function).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided and the mode notification is likely to be executed. While the first specific determination of causing the event is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is granted and the second specific determination of causing the specific event is performed. A special result for execution of the judgment is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, the first specific judgment is more likely to cause a specific event than the second specific judgment. Therefore, when a special result is obtained, the advantageous side (second operation mode) of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means and the advantageous side (first operation mode) for causing the specific event It is possible to realize a novel playability such as entrusting the player to select the mode).

Moreover, in the above configuration, when the result of the specific determination is the corresponding result that causes the specific event, the specific notification of the corresponding result is not given to the game, but to the special game that wins the special result after that. It is designed so that it may be executed by In other words, in a special game in which a special result is won, there may be an inconvenience that a specific notification can be made only after a stop operation is performed. It is configured to follow by performing in the game. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of freedom of the specific notification in the special game in which the special result is won, while enjoying the benefit of improving the game performance by providing the special result.

Feature C2. The specific determination means is set to be able to execute a third specific determination as the specific determination regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means in a specific game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result different from the special result. has been
The specific notification means, when the result of the third specific determination by the specific determination means is the corresponding result, the specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result, the special after the specific game The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it can be executed in a game.

According to the above configuration, instead of performing the specific notification in the specific game in which the third specific determination is performed regardless of the operation mode, the specific notification is performed in the special game in which the first specific determination and the second specific determination are performed depending on the operation mode. is performed, and the relationship between the operation mode and the specific notification is strengthened. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impression that the player has won the match result by his or her own operation mode, and it is possible to suitably contribute to the enhancement of interest in the game.

Feature C3. When the result of the third specific determination by the specific determination means is the corresponding result, the second specific notification means (display A gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of setting so that double eyes effect is performed in the start time CZ effect setting process by the control device 81 .

According to the above configuration, the specific notification may be performed in the specific game in which the third specific determination is performed regardless of the operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to expect an excellent effect of improving the degree of freedom of the specific notification in the special game while preventing the degree of attention of the specific game from being too low.

Feature C4. When the result of the third specific determination by the specific determination means is the corresponding result, the specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result is the game after the specific game and the special game is a third specific notification means that can be executed in a different game (a process of outputting a precursor command based on the delay flag and the end of the CZ mode by the main controller 101, and a precursor in the CZ effect setting process at the start by the display control device 81 The gaming machine according to feature C2 or feature C3, further comprising: a function of performing a double eye effect based on a command.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is not performed in the specific game in which the third specific determination is performed regardless of the operation mode, the specific notification can be executed even if the special result is not won. It is possible to suitably avoid the inconvenience of not being notified.

Feature C5. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the special game, and the stop operation means is in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the specific notification can be executed when the player is operated.

Even if there is a special result in which a first specific determination and a second specific determination are performed according to an operation mode, a specific notification corresponding to the result of the previous specific determination is executed in the special game winning the special result. Therefore, the specific notification can be executed regardless of the operation mode. Therefore, as in the configuration described above, by performing the specific notification regardless of the operation mode, the result of the first specific determination or the second specific determination (especially the second specific determination) becomes the corresponding result. It is possible to give the impression that the probability is higher than it actually is. By doing so, it is possible to anticipate the occurrence of the specific event even when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the second operation mode.

Feature C6. The second pattern combination is configured to be able to stop at the effective position even when the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (push order bell) different from the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5.

According to the above configuration, in the special game in which the special result is won, when the specific notification corresponding to the result of the previous specific determination is performed, the special result is won from the stop roll in the special game. It becomes difficult to determine whether it was a special result or a special result. In other words, it is possible to not only give an impression that a specific event will occur with a special result as a trigger, but also give an impression that a specific event will occur with a special result as a trigger, by using a configuration for performing a specific notification in a special game. . As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature C7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the second pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation can be performed. When the operating means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a third pattern different from the first pattern combination and the second pattern combination is placed at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature C6, characterized in that the combination can be stopped.

According to the above configuration, in order to increase the degree of attention in the game in which the special result is won by the specific notification when the special result is won, the second pattern combination may be stopped depending on the operation mode when the special result is won. However, since there are cases where this is not the case, it is assumed that the second symbol combination is stopped and the specific notification is made when the special result is won, and the operation mode when the special result is won is the first operation mode. It can give the impression that it was carried out precisely because of this. Therefore, by making good use of the commonality between the existing special result, which is a so-called positive hand, and the special result, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention when the special result is won.

Feature C8. When executing the specific determination based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the specific determination means executes the specific determination so that the corresponding result is less likely than the first specific determination. The gaming machine according to feature C6 or feature C7, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the specific notification is performed based on the result of the previous specific processing, and when the special result is won, the stop result when operated in the second operation mode and the special result It is also possible to use the commonality of the stop rolls to give the impression that a specific process based on the special result will result in a matching result. In other words, simply giving a specific notification even when a special result is won not only gives the impression that even a special result will result in a corresponding result, but may also result in a corresponding result based on the special result. By using the commonality of the stop roll with the special result, it is possible to reduce falseness in giving the impression that even the special result is a corresponding result, and to make it easier to give the impression. It becomes possible.

Feature C9. Based on the operation of the starting operation means, a predetermined notification (pressing order prediction effect) is executed, and the stop operation means is operated in the first specific order, so that the result of the specific determination is the corresponding one. By executing the first special notification (correct answer effect) suggesting that the result is the result, and by operating the stop operation means in a second specific order different from the first specific order, the result of the specific determination is the A special effect execution means (Fig. 70(c)) for executing a second special notification (incorrect answer effect) suggesting that the result is different from the corresponding result,
The special effect execution means executes the predetermined notification in the special game in which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means, and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that it is possible to execute the first special notification.

As in the above configuration, after executing the predetermined notification, according to the operation order of the stop operation means, the first special notification suggesting that the result of the specific determination is the specific result, or the fact that the result is not the specific result is executed. In a configuration in which an effect that makes the operation order of the stop operation means to be expected is executed, such as executing the suggested second special notification, the specific notification is performed in the special game in which the special result is won. When it is executed, even if it is operated in the second operation mode on the disadvantageous side, such as executing the second specific determination as the specific determination, the first special notification suggesting that the specific result is obtained. By doing so, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a specific event even when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the second operation mode.

Feature C10. The second pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position even when the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (push order bell) different from the special result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the second pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation means can be stopped. When the operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a third pattern different from the first pattern combination and the second pattern combination is placed at the effective position. It is a configuration that allows the combination to be stopped,
The special effect execution means executes the predetermined notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and the first special effect when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature C9, characterized in that it is capable of executing notification.

According to the above configuration, when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the first operation mode when the special result is won, the first special notification suggesting that the result of the specific determination is the specific result is issued. may be done. By doing so, when the special result is won, the first special notification is executed when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the second operation mode, and the specific notification is executed. , it is possible to give the impression as if the first special notification was executed (the specific result was won) by successfully stopping the second pattern combination when winning the special result. As a result, it is possible to improve not only the game winning the special result but also the game winning the special result, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C11. The special effect execution means executes the predetermined notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and the second special effect when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature C10, characterized in that it is capable of executing notification.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the second symbol combination is stopped in relation to the execution of the first special notification when the second symbol combination is successfully stopped. Since the second special notification is executed when the operation fails, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the first special notification is executed in relation to the operation order and the stop result.

Feature C12. The specific notification means can prevent the specific notification from being executed in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the first special notification is executed by the special effect execution means. (FIG. 70(d)).

According to the above configuration, even if the second symbol combination is successfully stopped when the special result is won, and the first special notification is executed, there is a case where the specific notification of the correspondence result is not executed. be. In other words, the specific notification is executed in part of the case where the second symbol combination is stopped and the first special notification is executed. By doing so, the contradiction that the specific notification is not executed (the specific event does not occur) even though the second pattern combination could be stopped when the special result is won is resolved. can do.

The inventions described in the features C1 to C12 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features C1 to C12, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. 2, a privilege granting means (a function of executing medal payout processing by the main controller 101) that grants a number of benefits corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
The privilege granting means requires a first period when the first symbol combination stops at the valid position to grant the first privilege, and the second symbol combination stops at the valid position. is a configuration that requires a second period longer than the first period when granting the second privilege,
Advantage determination means (for example, a function of executing an AT mode shift lottery or an AT addition lottery by the main controller 101) for executing an advantage judgment that causes an advantageous event for the player;
If the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, the advantageous event means that causes the advantageous event (for example, a process of shifting to the AT mode by the main controller 101, or a function to execute processing to add), and
After starting the predetermined notification (bomb effect), the advantageous content (explosion effect) corresponding to the fact that the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result, and the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result. Specific notification (effect of each game in CZ mode) in which any content including unadvantageous content (non-fire effect) corresponding to a result different from the result is notified is executed by a predetermined notification means. Means (a function of executing the CZ effect setting process at the start and the CZ effect setting process at the stop by the display control device 81);
with
After each circulating body stops, the first timing at which the first period elapses is more likely than the second timing at which the second period elapses after each circulating body stops. The game machine is characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification is set so as to be easily executed as the advantageous content.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a number of game values corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, if the lottery result is a special result, a first privilege is provided when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege, which is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, is given, so that if a special result occurs, the privilege is on the advantageous side. It may be advantageous for the player to select the operation of (second operation mode).

Also, an advantageous determination is made to cause an advantageous event advantageous to the player, and the result of the advantageous determination is notified as a specific notification. The specific notification is set so that after the execution of the predetermined notification, either the advantageous content corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event or the non-advantageous content not corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event is notified. It is thought that the player who desires the generation of the special notification expects that the specific notification will be of advantageous content.

Then, the second period, during which the second privilege is granted, passes after the first period, during which the first privilege is granted, has elapsed after the rotation of each orbiting body has stopped. It is set so that the specific notification is more likely to have advantageous contents than after the notification.

By doing so, they were able to use the conflicting feelings of wanting to obtain a more advantageous privilege and wanting to confirm the occurrence of an advantageous event by making the specific notification an advantageous content, and winning a special result. It is possible to dramatically improve the playability of the game.

Feature D2. The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, as the advantageous judgment, a second advantageous judgment that is less likely to result in the advantageous result than the first advantageous judgment is executed, or the advantageous judgment is executed. The gaming machine according to feature D1, which is set so as not to play.

According to the above configuration, in the special game in which the special role is won, the content of the advantage determination and the presence or absence of execution differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, and the first operation mode on the side to which the first privilege is granted However, advantageous events are more likely to occur than in the second operation mode on the side to which the second privilege is granted. As described above, the advantageous event occurs at the first timing when the first period during which the first privilege is granted passes, and at the second timing when the second period during which the second privilege is granted passes. Therefore, with such a configuration, the relationship between the content of the advantage judgment in the special game, whether or not it is executed, and the privilege to be given matches the specific notification. Therefore, contradiction between the advantageous determination and the specific notification can be made difficult to occur, and the reliability of the specific notification can be improved, which can be greatly used to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D3. When the privilege granting means grants a third privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege and more disadvantageous to the player than the second privilege, the third privilege is longer than the first period. requires a third period shorter than the two periods,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specified result and the pattern combination corresponding to the specified result stops at the valid position, the third benefit is granted by the privilege granting means as a privilege corresponding to the specified result. and
At a third timing when the third period elapses after each of the rotating bodies stops, the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is less likely to be performed as the advantageous content than at the first timing, and The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set to be more likely to be executed as the advantageous content than at the second timing.

According to the above configuration, not only the first privilege and the second privilege that can be granted when winning a special result, but also the third privilege that can be granted when winning another specific result depends on the length of the period required to grant the privilege. , is associated with the likelihood of advantageous content. By doing so, it is novel that it is possible to break away from the conventional game of trying to obtain a privilege with a higher degree of advantage, and by acquiring a privilege with a lower degree of advantage, another advantageous event is likely to occur. It is possible to realize a great playability.

Feature D4. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, the second pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the second privilege is granted by the privilege granting means,
At the second timing in which the second period elapses after each of the orbiting bodies stops, if the second period is a period triggered by the special result, it is a period triggered by the special result. Characteristic D1 characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set so as to be less likely to be executed as the advantageous content, or is set so as not to be the advantageous content. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3.

According to the above configuration, even if the period required for granting the privilege is the same as the second period, the likelihood of obtaining advantageous content will differ depending on the lottery results. In particular, the stop roll is common between the case where the second privilege is granted in the case of a special result and the case where the second privilege is granted in the case of a special result, and the stop roll is advantageous. The easiness of the content cannot be grasped. By doing so, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting the type of content notification based on the lottery result and the length of the period required for granting the privilege.

Feature D5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, a third pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. and
If the first period is a period triggered by the special result at the first timing in which the first period elapses after each of the orbiting bodies stops, the period triggered by the special result Characteristic D1 characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set so as to be less likely to be executed as the advantageous content, or is set so as not to be the advantageous content. The gaming machine according to any one of features D4.

According to the above configuration, even if the period required for granting the privilege is the same as the first period, the likelihood of obtaining advantageous content will differ depending on the lottery results. In particular, since the stop roll differs between when the first benefit is granted in the case of a special result and when the first benefit is granted in the case of a special result, the stop roll and the privilege are different. It is possible to realize the playability of predicting the type of content notification from the required period and length.

Feature D6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay result stops at the valid position, the bonus is given by the bonus granting means to the same number as the game resulting in the replay result. is a configuration in which a replay process is executed in which the number of bets is set,
In the case of a predetermined re-gaming result (for example, Cherry A to C), a fourth period is required when a predetermined number of bets is set in the re-gaming process, and a specific re-gaming result (for example, normal In the case of replies A to C), it is set so that a fifth period longer than the fourth period is required when the predetermined number of bets is set in the replay process,
A fourth timing, in which the fourth period elapses after each of the rotating bodies stops, is more sensitive to the specific notification means than a fifth timing, in which the fifth period elapses after each of the rotating bodies stops. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the content notification of the specific notification is set so as to be easily executed as the advantageous content.

According to the above configuration, the likelihood that the specific notification becomes advantageous content also differs depending on the length of the period in which the bet amount is set based on the replay result winning, and the bet amount is set in a shorter period. It is more likely that the content will be advantageous if it is used. By doing so, there is no need to greatly differ the effect content when the first benefit or the second benefit is granted, as in other special results, and the effect content in the case of a replay result. With a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize the novel playability of the feature D1 even in replay results.

Feature D7. When the privilege granting means grants a third privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege and more disadvantageous to the player than the second privilege, the third privilege is longer than the first period. requires a third period shorter than the two periods,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specified result and the pattern combination corresponding to the specified result stops at the valid position, the third privilege is given by the privilege granting means as a privilege corresponding to the specified result. and
At a third timing when the third period elapses after each of the rotating bodies stops, the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is less likely to be executed as the advantageous content than at the first timing, and It is set so that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be executed as the advantageous content than the second timing,
The fourth period is set as a period of the same or substantially the same length as the third period,
The fourth timing after each revolving body stops based on the predetermined replay result, and the third timing after each revolving body stops based on the specified result. The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the ease of execution of the advantageous contents in the specific notification by the specific notification means is set to be the same or to the same extent.

According to the above configuration, not only the first privilege and the second privilege that can be granted when winning a special result, but also the third privilege that can be granted when winning another specific result depends on the length of the period required to grant the privilege. , the likelihood of becoming an advantageous content becomes associated. By doing so, it is novel that it is possible to break away from the conventional game of trying to obtain a privilege with a higher degree of advantage, and by acquiring a privilege with a lower degree of advantage, another advantageous event is likely to occur. It is possible to realize a great playability.

In addition, the fourth period in which the predetermined number of bets is set based on the predetermined re-game result is set to have the same or substantially the same length as the third period, and the predetermined re-game result is also specified. Even in the case of the result, it is common that advantageous contents are likely to be obtained when the third period or the fourth period has passed since the orbiting body stopped. In this way, regardless of the type of the so-called small win result or replay result, the novel game characteristics of feature D1 such that the likelihood of obtaining advantageous content differs according to the period after the revolving body stops. can be realized, and it is possible to greatly use it for improving the interest of the game.

Feature D8. When the privilege granting means grants a third privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege and more disadvantageous to the player than the second privilege, the third privilege is longer than the first period. requires a third period shorter than the two periods,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specified result and the pattern combination corresponding to the specified result stops at the valid position, the third privilege is given by the privilege granting means as a privilege corresponding to the specified result. and
At a third timing when the third period elapses after each of the rotating bodies stops, the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is less likely to be executed as the advantageous content than at the first timing, and It is set so that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be executed as the advantageous content than the second timing,
The fifth period is set as a period longer than the third period,
After each revolving body stops based on the specific replay result, the third timing occurs after each revolving body stops based on the specified result rather than the fifth timing after the revolving body stops based on the specified result. The game machine according to feature D6 or feature D7, characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set so as to easily become the advantageous content in the case where the game is played.

According to the above configuration, not only the first privilege and the second privilege that can be granted when winning a special result, but also the third privilege that can be granted when winning another specific result depends on the length of the period required to grant the privilege. , is associated with the likelihood of advantageous content. By doing so, it is novel that it is possible to break away from the conventional game of trying to obtain a privilege with a higher degree of advantage, and by acquiring a privilege with a lower degree of advantage, another advantageous event is likely to occur. It is possible to realize a great playability.

In addition, the fifth period in which a predetermined number of bets is set based on a specific replay result is set as a period longer than the length of the third period. When the fifth period has passed since the stop, it is set to be less advantageous than when the third period has passed since the orbiting body stopped in the case of the specific result. In this way, regardless of the type of so-called small win result or replay result, the novel game property of the feature D1 that the likelihood of becoming advantageous content differs depending on the period after the revolving body stops. can be realized, and it is possible to greatly use it for improving the interest of the game.

Feature D9. A specific number of the stop operation means is provided,
Any one of characteristics D1 to D8, wherein the specific notification means starts the predetermined notification when the specific number of the stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means is operated. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the period from the start of the predetermined notification in the specific notification until the content notification becomes advantageous content is associated with the period from the stop of the all-rotating body to the completion of awarding of the privilege. Become. By doing so, even the period after the stop of the revolving body can be incorporated into the game.

Feature D10. After executing the content notification of the non-advantageous content, the specific notification means executes result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means, and after executing the content notification of the advantageous content. The game according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized in that it is possible to execute corresponding notification (AT winning notification) corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event before or after the result notification. machine.

As in the above configuration, when performing content notification of advantageous content, correspondence notification and result notification are performed as a set, and when performing content notification of non-advantageous content, only result notification is performed. If, as in D1, the shorter the period after the stop of the orbiting body is, the more advantageous the contents are likely to be, it becomes possible to properly secure the period for the corresponding notification, and the length of the period for presentation can be reduced. There is no need to make the difference according to the result of the advantageous determination, and it is possible to expect excellent effects of the feature D1 while optimizing the progress of the game.

The inventions described in the features D1 to D10 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Advantageous determination means (e.g., main control unit) for executing an advantageous determination to generate an advantageous event for the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number) A function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at the time of start and AT lottery processing at the time of stop by the device 101),
The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, as the advantageous judgment, a second advantageous judgment that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous judgment is executed, or the advantageous judgment is executed. is set not to run
The result of the advantageous judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the advantageous judgment is specified before the advantageous judgment is made. function),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the destination identifying means is a first destination capable of identifying the result of the first advantageous determination when the specific numerical information is used for the first advantageous determination. provided with specific means,
In the special game, at a specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means is executed, a specific notification means (display control device) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the specific result by the first destination identification means A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing a first stop ON effect setting process according to 81 and a process for performing a specific notification effect.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided and an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player. While the first advantageous determination is executed as the advantageous determination that causes the stop operation means to be operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given and the second advantageous determination is performed as the advantageous determination. A special result is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, the first advantageous judgment is more advantageous than the second advantageous judgment, so the special result In this case, the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the judgment (first operation mode). It is possible.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, in a game in which a special result with a different advantage or advantageous determination is awarded by such an operation mode, at least the first operation mode is operated before the advantageous determination is performed. When the result of the first advantageous judgment is specified when the first advantageous judgment is executed, and the specific notification corresponding to the specified result is executed before the execution timing of the advantageous judgment There is

By doing so, the result of the first advantage determination on the side advantageous to the player can be identified first, and the effect corresponding to the result on the advantageous side can be performed in advance. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect that strongly encourages the result of the advantageous determination in advance. Therefore, the degree of freedom in performance design is greatly improved, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature E2. After the branch timing (the first stop ON operation) in which the operation of each of the stop operation means is performed, the specific notification means determines whether the operation mode will be the first operation mode or the second operation mode. The game according to feature E1, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing a process for performing a tenpai effect by the display control device 81) for performing the specific notification with the timing of the specific timing as the specific timing. machine.

According to the above configuration, it becomes impossible for the player to decide which operation mode to operate in accordance with the specific notification. In other words, for example, if the contents of the specific notification can be completely detected before the operation, and if the detected contents are not favorable for the player, the second advantageous determination is made, but the second privilege is obtained. Although it is conceivable that the operation is performed in the second operation mode, if the specific notification is generated after the timing at which the first operation mode and the second operation mode diverge as described above, which of the two operations is performed based on the specific notification? It is possible to start an effect corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment before making the advantageous judgment while making it impossible to decide whether to use the operation mode.

Feature E3. Among the plurality of stop operation means, operating a specific stop operation means (left stop switch 42) for a specific number (first) is the first operation mode, which is different from the specific stop operation means. The second operation mode is to operate predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) at the specific number, and the branch timing is the timing at which the specific number stop operation means is operated. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by:

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature E2, and by doing so, it is possible to determine which advantageous judgment is to be executed simply by grasping which stop operation means is operated for a specific number. , making it possible to determine the advantage when winning a special result with a relatively simple configuration, and to specify by the first specifying means when winning a special result.

Feature E4. Operating the specific stop operation means at the specific number, and operating the specific stop operation means at the timing when the specific pattern on the specific loop corresponding to the specific stop operation means exists in the specific range. is the first operation mode, and a predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means is operated in the specific number, and the specific stop operation means is operated It is set so that the second operation mode is to operate the specific stop operation means at a timing when the specific design on the specific circular body is not present in the specific range. The gaming machine according to feature E3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the first operation mode and the second operation mode are the first operation mode including not only the operation of the specific stop operation means for the specific number, but also the operation timing of the specific stop operation means. or the second operation mode. By doing so, the degree of difficulty of performing the first operation mode is improved, the game playability including the operation for performing the first advantageous determination is improved, and the first operation mode and the second operation mode are improved. If the operation is performed regardless of the above, the probability of the second operation mode becomes high, and this makes it easier to obtain the second privilege on the advantageous side. Therefore, the game property that gives priority to performing an advantageous determination and the game property that does not give priority to performing an advantageous determination are greatly different, and the enjoyment of determining which one to select can be improved. .

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to feature E3 or feature E4, wherein the specific notification means can execute the specific notification based on an operation of the stop operation means after the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is executed based on the operation after the specific-th operation, which is the branching timing of the operation modes. By doing so, it is possible to secure a time allowance for performing the specific notification without having a tight processing configuration such as specifying by the destination specifying means at the branch timing and executing the specific notification. It becomes possible. Further, since the specific operation is the branching timing of the operation mode, it is thought that the player is trying to perform the operation more cautiously. There is a possibility that the special notification may be overlooked. In this respect, by generating the specific notification after the branching timing as described above, it is possible to preferably prevent the specific notification from being overlooked.

Feature E6. In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result different from the special result, a second specific notification means (when the special role is not won by the display control device 81) is performed at the specific timing The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing processing for performing a tenpai effect or a specific notification effect.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is generated even if it is another specific result, the specific notification is less likely to serve as a mark of the special result. Therefore, it becomes difficult to predict the game result from the content of the notification, and it is possible to enjoy the notification more purely.

Feature E7. The advantageous determination means is capable of executing a third advantageous determination as the advantageous determination before the stop operation means is operated when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result,
The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein the second specific notification means executes the specific notification based on the result of the third advantage determination.

According to the above configuration, unlike special results in which the contents of advantageous judgments and whether or not they are executed differ depending on the operation mode, in the case of specific results, the third advantageous judgment is executed before the operation of the stop operation means. Further, since the specific notification based on the specific result is based on the result of the third advantage determination, it is not pre-notified even at the specific timing, and there is no need to go through special processing such as a destination specific means. That is, on the premise of such a configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification in the special game that won the special result is matched to the execution timing of the specific notification when the specific result is won, and only the special game Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of incongruity that the mode of notification is different.

Feature E8. The advantageous judgment means uses the same specific numerical information when executing the first advantageous judgment, when executing the second advantageous judgment, and when executing the third advantageous judgment. The gaming machine according to feature E7.

According to the above configuration, since the common specific numerical information is used in any advantageous judgment, the storage capacity can be reduced more than preparing the specific numerical information for each advantageous judgment. planned. Moreover, even if it is not possible to grasp which lottery result will be obtained at the time of acquisition, or even if it is not possible to grasp which operation mode will be, the common acquisition processing can be performed without making the processing for acquisition different. It is possible to make an advantageous judgment, and the overwhelming simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Feature E9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the destination identification means is a second destination that can identify the result of the second advantage judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the second advantage judgment. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that it comprises specifying means.

According to the above configuration, not only the first advantageous judgment of the advantageous side but also the second advantageous judgment side is specified in advance, so that an advantageous event occurs by operating in the second operation mode. To cover such a scene and make it possible to perform a specific notification or to perform another notification, and to diversify the game characteristics based on the notification in the special game winning the special result and the notification. becomes possible.

Feature E10. When the identification result by the destination identifying means is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made, the first advantageous determination is performed. Means (display control any one of feature E1 to feature E9, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of generating a ten-pie effect even when the device 81 has not received a first operation winning notice command or the like. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is not determined from the specific notification that an advantageous event will not occur even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, that is, that the operation should be performed in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode. Become. By doing so, the specific notification becomes less likely to serve as an index for making it easier to obtain the second privilege, and it becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Feature E11. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Advantageous determination means (e.g., main control unit) for executing an advantageous determination to generate an advantageous event for the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number) A function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at the time of start and AT lottery processing at the time of stop by the device 101),
The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, as the advantageous judgment, a second advantageous judgment that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous judgment is executed, or the advantageous judgment is executed. is set not to run
The result of the advantageous judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the advantageous judgment is specified before the advantageous judgment is made. function),
In the special game, at a specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means is executed, a specific notification means (display control device 81 of a function for executing a first stop ON effect setting process and a process for performing a specific notification effect).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided and an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player. While the first advantageous determination is executed as the advantageous determination that causes the stop operation means to be operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given and the second advantageous determination is performed as the advantageous determination. A special result is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, the first advantageous judgment is more advantageous than the second advantageous judgment, so the special result In this case, the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the judgment (first operation mode). It is possible.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, in a game in which a special result with a different privilege or advantageous judgment is awarded by such an operation mode, the advantageous judgment is executed before the advantageous judgment is made. There is a case where the result of the advantageous determination is specified and the specific notification corresponding to the specified result is executed before the execution timing of the advantageous determination.

By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect in advance in accordance with the result of the advantageous determination, so that it is possible to set an effect in advance that greatly enhances the result of the advantageous determination. Therefore, the degree of freedom in performance design is greatly improved, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of the features E1 to E10 individually to the feature E11, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. can also be applied in combination.

The inventions described in the features E1 to E11 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features E1 to E11, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Advantageous determination means (e.g., main control unit) for executing an advantageous determination to generate an advantageous event for the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number) A function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at the time of start and AT lottery processing at the time of stop by the device 101),
The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, as the advantageous judgment, a second advantageous judgment that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous judgment is executed, or the advantageous judgment is executed. is set not to run
The result of the advantageous judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the advantageous judgment is specified before the advantageous judgment is made. function) and
In the special game, at a specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means is executed, a specific notification means (display control device 81 of A function that executes a first stop ON effect setting process and a process for performing a specific notification effect),
When the identification result by the destination identifying means is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made, the first advantageous determination is performed. Limiting means (display a function of executing a process of generating a ten-pie effect even when the first operation winning notice command or the like by the control device 81 is not received;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided and an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player. While the first advantageous determination is executed as the advantageous determination that causes the stop operation means to be operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given and the second advantageous determination is performed as the advantageous determination. A special result is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, the first advantageous judgment is more advantageous than the second advantageous judgment, so the special result In this case, the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the judgment (first operation mode). It is possible.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, in a game in which a special result with a different privilege or advantageous judgment is awarded by such an operation mode, the advantageous judgment is executed before the advantageous judgment is made. There is a case where the result of the advantageous determination is specified and the specific notification corresponding to the specified result is executed before the execution timing of the advantageous determination.

By doing so, it becomes possible to perform an effect in advance according to the result of the advantageous determination, so that it is possible to set an effect in advance that greatly enhances the result of the advantageous determination.

However, if the result of the advantageous determination can be detected in advance and it is possible to determine which operation mode should be operated, it becomes difficult to ensure the fairness of the game. In other words, if the result of the first advantage determination on the advantageous side does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, then the second operation mode is better. The act of operating and acquiring a 2nd privilege can also be performed. In that regard, the above configuration includes a limiting means that prevents the determination of a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event even if the first advantageous determination is made when the specific notification is performed. This makes it difficult for the above actions to take place. Therefore, while ensuring the fairness of the game, it is possible to preferably expect the effect of the specific notification.

In the above configuration, "if the identification result by the destination identification means is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made, the When the first advantageous determination is made, the specific notification by the specific notification means is performed in a notification mode that can be executed even when the result of the first advantageous determination corresponds to the occurrence of the advantageous event. means for executing" means "the specific notification means executes the specific notification so as not to determine that the result of the first advantageous determination is a result corresponding to not causing the advantageous event" ``When the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means and the first advantageous determination is performed, the result of the first advantageous determination causes the advantageous event and when the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means and the first advantageous determination is performed, the result of the first advantageous determination is the The notification mode of the specific notification is set so that there is a case where the result corresponds to not causing an advantageous event."

Feature F2. When the identification result by the destination identifying means is a result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is performed, the first advantageous determination is performed. If the result of the first advantageous determination is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event, the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means in a notification mode (fixed effect) that is not executed. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein is allowed.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification in the notification mode in which it is determined that the advantageous event will occur if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, it is determined that the advantageous event will not occur. By restricting the notification mode, it is possible not only to solve the problem that the reliability of the specific notification itself is lowered, but also to improve the reliability, and to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification. can be suitably increased.

Feature F3. The specific notification means performs execution of a special notification (tenpai effect) by a predetermined notification means as the specific notification,
Even if the identification result by the destination identification means is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made, the special notification The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, characterized in that it is set so that

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature F1. If, like the above configuration, the configuration is such that the special notification can be executed regardless of the identification result by the destination identification means, the specific notification is determined by whether or not the special notification is executed. It is possible to achieve the excellent effect of the feature F1 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature F4. Execution lottery means for executing the lottery for executing the special notification in the special game (function for executing the tenpai effect lottery process by the display control device 81),
the execution by the execution lottery means when the identification result by the destination identification means is a result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made; The probability of obtaining an execution result corresponding to the execution of the special notification in the lottery is higher than the result of the first advantageous determination being a result not corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, or the execution lottery The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized in that it is set to execute the special notification without going through.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the specified result by the first specifying means only by adjusting the winning probability of the special notification execution lottery or changing the presence or absence of the execution lottery, and the result of the advantageous determination can be notified in advance. It is possible to achieve the effect of the feature F1 with an extremely simple configuration while making the notification.

Feature F5. When the result of the advantageous determination is a response result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, and when the result corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination is notified, the result of the advantageous determination does not cause the advantageous event First result notification means (display control device 81 executes a bomb effect at the time of AT winning by the display control device 81) for executing a predetermined notification after executing a non-correspondence result as the result notification, and executing the corresponding result as the result notification function) and
When the result of the advantageous determination is the non-corresponding result, when performing the result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination, after executing the non-corresponding result as the result notification, the predetermined notification is performed, and the non-corresponding result is performed. A second result notification means (function of executing a bomb effect when the AT is not won by the display control device 81) that executes the correspondence result as the result notification;
When the specified result by the destination specifying means is the result that the result of the advantageous determination is the corresponding result, and the specified report is performed by the specified reporting means, the result reporting by the first result reporting means is performed (function for executing processing for generating a bomb effect when receiving the first operation winning notice command or the like by the display control device 81) Features F1 to The gaming machine according to any one of features F4.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous determination is the response result corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event, the non-response result not corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event is notified as the result notification. After that, a so-called revival effect is provided in which the response result is notified as a result notification via a predetermined notification, or the predetermined notification is terminated with a non-response result. After the non-correspondence result is obtained, the corresponding result is obtained through a predetermined notification. In other words, even if a specific notification is performed and a non-response result that does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event is once notified as a result notification, there is a possibility that it will be revived and the corresponding result will be notified as a result notification. Therefore, even if it is possible to predict that the result of the advantageous determination will be a non-corresponding result from the mode of specific notification and whether or not it is executed, if that alone is set to the second operation mode, the possibility of the above-mentioned revival will be self-evident. will be lost by the operation of By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from becoming a mark for efficiently acquiring the second privilege, while expecting the effect of the specific notification.

Feature F6. When the specified result by the destination specifying means is the result that the result of the advantageous determination is the result of non-correspondence, and the specified report is performed by the specified reporting means, the result by the second result reporting means Characteristic F5 characterized by having means for performing notification (function for executing processing for generating bomb effect even if the first operation winning notice command or the like by the display control device 81 is not received). The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, as a result of specifying the result of the advantageous judgment in advance, even if the result of specifying that the advantageous judgment is a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event, the non-corresponding result After that, the result notification is performed so that the non-correspondence result is further obtained through the predetermined notification. In this way, even if the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result, the so-called resurrection effect is performed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from becoming a mark for efficiently obtaining the second privilege.

Feature F7. Having a specific number of the stop operation means,
The gaming machine according to feature F5 or feature F6, wherein the first result notification means and the second result notification means execute the predetermined notification when the specific number of the stop operation means are operated. .

According to the above configuration, the predetermined notification is generated by operating all the stop operation means. In other words, after the result notification is performed by the first result notification means and the second result notification means, the predetermined notification is switched to the correct result notification (remains as it is), and the predetermined notification is performed by all the stop operation means. is operated, and the correct result is notified after the operation of the stop operation means is completed. By doing so, in a configuration in which the content of the advantageous determination and whether or not to execute it differ depending on the operation mode, while notifying the result in advance as a specific notification, the user can enjoy the operation of the stop operation means and the development of the notification until the end. It becomes possible to let

Feature F8. The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the specific notification is performed before the specific number of the stop operation means are operated.

With the above configuration, it is clarified that the specific notification is executed before the advantageous determination, and it is possible to preferably expect the effect of the specific notification.

In addition, the inventions described in the features F1 to F8 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features F1 to F8, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Advantageous determination means (e.g., main control unit) for executing an advantageous determination to generate an advantageous event for the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number) A function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at the time of start and AT lottery processing at the time of stop by the device 101),
The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, as the advantageous judgment, a second advantageous judgment that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous judgment is executed, or the advantageous judgment is executed. is set not to run
The result of the advantageous judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the advantageous judgment is specified by destination specifying means (preliminary judgment processing etc. by the main controller 101) that can be specified before the advantageous judgment is made. function) and
If the specified result by the destination specifying means is a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made, the predetermined result in the special game At a specific timing before the operation of the stop operation means is executed, a specific notification means capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the non-response result (a process for performing a specific notification effect by the display control device 81 functions to perform) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided and an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player. While the first advantageous determination is executed as the advantageous determination that causes the stop operation means to be operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given and the second advantageous determination is performed as the advantageous determination. A special result is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, the first advantageous judgment is more advantageous than the second advantageous judgment, so the special result In this case, the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the judgment (first operation mode). It is possible.

In addition, in the above configuration, it is assumed that the first advantageous judgment is executed before the advantageous judgment is made in the game in which the special result that is different from the privilege given by the operation mode or the advantageous judgment is won. However, if the result of the first advantageous determination is specified and the specified result is a non-corresponding result that does not cause an advantageous event, the specific notification corresponding to the non-corresponding result is an advantageous decision may be executed before the execution timing of By doing so, when the special result is won, even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the result of the first advantage determination on the advantageous side does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event. , to obtain a second privilege by performing an operation in the second operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the specific notification means can perform the specific notification when the start operation means is operated as the specific timing.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed when the start operation means is operated before the stop operation means is operated. By doing so, it is meaningless that the specific notification is executed after the operation has already been performed in the first operation mode when the specific notification causes the second operation mode to be performed instead of the first operation mode. It is possible to avoid such a production.

Feature G3. Execution determination means (function for executing a navigation mode lottery process by the display control device 81) for determining execution of the specific notification,
Characteristic feature G1 or characteristic feature G2, characterized in that the specific notification means executes the specific notification when a result of execution determination by the execution determination means is an execution result corresponding to execution of the specific notification. game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the special result is won and the result of the first advantageous determination is the non-correspondence result, the specific notification is not executed unless the execution determination is won. In this way, in addition to the game in which the first advantageous judgment is won and an advantageous event is generated, the game in which the first advantageous judgment is not won and the advantageous event does not occur, but the second privilege is obtained in the second operation mode is added. Therefore, it becomes necessary to win the execution determination in the game for obtaining the second privilege. Therefore, a multi-level expectation game is realized, such as aiming to win the first advantageous judgment, and at least wanting to win the execution judgment if the first advantageous judgment is not won, It is possible to suitably improve the interest in the game.

Feature G4. A plurality of setting values are set that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. Means (a function of executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101),
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value is set, the result of the first advantage determination is the While the probability of obtaining a corresponding result corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event is common, the case where the first setting value is set by the setting means and the case where the second setting value is set. , The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the execution determination results of the execution determination means have different probabilities of being the execution results.

According to the above configuration, even if the winning probability of the first advantageous judgment is not changed according to the setting value, the winning probability of the execution judgment is changed according to the setting value, thereby setting the acquisition rate of the second privilege when the special result is won. It is possible to make it different depending on the value. By doing so, it is possible to change the number of games that can be played with a unit game value (so-called base) according to the setting value without changing the occurrence rate of advantageous events when designing the ball payout rate. Become.

Feature G5. As game states, a specific state (navigation mode) in which the specific notification by the specific notification means is performed, and a non-specific state in which the specific notification by the specific notification means is less likely to be performed than in the specific state or in which the specific notification is not performed state (normal mode) and are set,
Means for shifting from the non-specific state to the specific state when a transition condition (navi mode winning) is satisfied (function for executing processing for setting the navigation mode flag by the display control device 81);
Means for shifting from the specific state to the non-specific state when the termination condition (shift to AT mode) is satisfied (function for executing processing for clearing the navigation mode flag by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, by shifting to the specific state, it becomes easier for the specific notification to occur, so it is possible to receive an advantageous judgment that efficiently causes an advantageous event while acquiring the second privilege when the special role is won. Become. By setting such a specific state, it is possible to make a great use of it in order to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the "specific state" may be expressed as the "first state", and the "non-specific state" may be expressed as the "second state".

Feature G6. The privilege granting means grants a game value to be provided in the game as the privilege,
The first privilege is a first number of game values,
the second privilege is a second number of gaming values greater than the first number;
The average number of games that can be executed per unit game value or the average increase in the game value that increases per unit game is higher than the first game mode in which the special game is operated in the first operation mode in the non-specified state. When the specific notification is performed in the special game in the specific state, the operation is performed in the second operation mode, and when the specific notification is not performed in the special game, the first operation mode. The number of second game modes operated by is increased,
Furthermore, the average number of games that can be executed per unit game value or the average number of increase in game value that increases per unit game value is the above-mentioned second The special game is operated in the non-specific state than the second game mode in which the operation is performed in the second operation mode and the specific notification is not performed in the special game, and the special game is operated in the first operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature G5, characterized in that the number of third game modes operated in the second operation mode is greater.

The above configuration specifically expresses the benefit of the specific notification in relation to the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and as a result of the above configuration, the specific notification causes an advantageous event. The second game mode is always operated in the first operation mode, in which the second game value is acquired without receiving the advantageous determination in the case of a non-corresponding result, while efficiently receiving the advantageous determination of The average number of games per unit game value and the average number of increases in the game value per unit game are greater than in the first game mode, and the per unit game value is greater than in the third game mode in which the operation is always performed in the second operation mode. The average number of games played and the average number of increases in game value per unit number of games are reduced. Therefore, in making the player select which game to play, the number of options increases, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature G7. As a lottery result by the lottery means, regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means, the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is a special result that is more likely to be a corresponding result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event than other results. is set and
In the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, special notification means (specific notification effect based on the special combination by the display control device 81) for executing special notification having a notification mode common to the specific notification by the specific notification means A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that it has a function of executing

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification and special notification have the same notification mode, it is easy to win the advantageous judgment whether it is notified to operate in the second operation mode when winning the special result. It is not possible to determine whether or not the special result is notified. In other words, while expecting that an advantageous event will occur based on the special result winning, it can be reported that the second privilege can be obtained even if the special result is not won, Even in the case of operating in the second operation mode because the first advantageous determination is not won, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the occurrence of an advantageous event.

The 'other result' may be a 'special result' or may be a different result. In addition, the "special result" may not be the result of the favorable determination that is most likely to be the corresponding result, and there may be a result that is more likely to be the corresponding result than the "special result". It is sufficient if the result of the advantageous determination triggered by is the correspondence result.

Feature G8. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and when the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the valid position, the privilege corresponding to the special result is given by the privilege giving means. is the configuration,
In the special notification, a notification mode is set so as to notify that an operation should be performed in a third operation mode capable of stopping the special pattern combination at the effective position,
The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the third operation mode is included in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the notification that the special result prize should be established is made as a special notification, and the third operation mode that enables the special result prize to be established is included in the second operation mode. Then, when a specific notification is performed in a similar notification mode, it is possible to perform the second operation mode while aiming for a special result prize, and the player acquires the second privilege without being particularly conscious of it. be able to

Feature G9. A normal state (normal section) and an advantageous state (advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set,
When a predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, termination means for terminating the advantageous state (advantageous section based on reaching the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number in the section display second process by the main controller 101) function to execute termination processing),
Execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means is allowed in a situation where termination of the advantageous state by the termination means is specified before the termination condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8.

According to the above configuration, by performing the specific notification, it is possible to satisfy the termination condition earlier, or increase the total acquired privilege acquired when the termination condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

It should be noted that the inventions described in the features G1 to G9 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features G1 to G9, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop operation is performed. When means is operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, a second result (9th minor combination to 32nd The order result (push order bell) that enables the winning of the small role) is set,
Advantage determination means (for example, AT lottery processing at the time of start by the main controller 101, AT lottery processing at the time of stop, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to instruction functions such as AT addition lottery processing),
The advantageous determination means determines that the game state is shifted from the normal state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of start by the main controller 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing),
In the first order result of the order results, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the winning of the first result or the result corresponding to the first result can be established, By operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, the winning of the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be established, and is different from the first order result of the order results. In the second order result, by operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, the winning of the first result or the result corresponding to the first result can be established, while the stop operation means can be operated in the second order result. It is set so that the winning of the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be established by operating in the first operation order,
An order notification means (a function of executing a push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing order notification of the operation order of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal state is the order result, the order notification means is configured to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. on the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the advantageous state, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed if the result is the first order result. and if it is the second order result, an order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, winning of a third result (33rd minor combination) can be established, and the advantage judgment by the advantage judgment means While the first advantageous determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the third result Winning of the fourth result (first small combination to sixth small combination) with a large number of wins can be established, and the advantageous event is generated as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means rather than the first advantageous judgment. A special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment that is unlikely to result in a corresponding advantageous result is executed or the advantageous judgment is not executed,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order as the second operation mode, the winning of the fourth result can be established, and When the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order as the second operation mode, the winning of the fourth result can be established,
The order notifying means, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the special result, determines a predetermined one of order notifications of a plurality of operation orders including the first operation order and the second operation order. A specific order notification means (notification of the pressing order for the sixth minor combination) corresponding to the other one operation order can be executed by the predetermined notification means (the special combination winning game by the main controller 101) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing notification of pressing order for 6 small wins.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the first result winning can be established, while in the second operation order. There is provided a so-called push order combination in which, when operated, a second result win with fewer benefits than the first result win can be established, and by shifting to an advantageous state, the push order combination of the push order combination is provided. Since the order notification is performed, it is possible to greatly vary the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of the order notification, thereby realizing excellent game characteristics.

As the order result, a first order result and a second order result are set, and the order of operations for winning the first result is different from each other. Then, even in the case of the order result, if it is before the transition to the advantageous state, the order is set to be notified in a manner in which it is impossible to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. Therefore, it is difficult to discriminate the order of operations for winning the first result from the lottery results of each game. By doing so, when the transition to the advantageous state occurs, the degree of advantage is greatly changed by the order notification, and the inconvenience of enjoying the benefit even before the transition can be eliminated.

In addition, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the determination result of the advantage determination corresponds to the occurrence of an advantageous event. While the first advantageous determination that tends to result in an advantageous result is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the fourth result winning, which has more benefits than the third result winning, can be established. A special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment, which is unlikely to result in an advantageous result, is executed as an advantageous judgment, and the player can select the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment or the one with more benefits. You can add gameplay.

In this case, when the special result is won, even if the operation is performed in the first operation order in which the first result wins in the case of the first order result, the first result wins in the case of the second order result. Even if the operation is performed in the second operation order, the second operation mode is set so that the fourth result winning is established.

Here, before transitioning to an advantageous state, it is considered advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode in order to generate an advantageous event as much as possible when winning a special result. It is considered that the operation should be performed in the second operation mode in order to acquire many benefits.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a special result is won in an advantageous state, order notification such as the first operation order or the second operation order is performed to promote establishment of the fourth result winning a prize. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide information for the second operation mode dedicated to the special result in realizing the game property of acquiring more benefits when the special result is won, and the storage capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in the above configuration, as the second operation mode at the time of winning the special role, the specific order notification corresponding to one predetermined operation order out of the first operation order and the second operation order is used as the order notification. It is configured to notify. By doing so, although the fourth result prize is established in any order of operation, there is no need to determine which order of operation is to be reported at the time of winning the special role, and the processing configuration is extremely simple. can do. Therefore, with an extremely simple configuration, it is possible to achieve the fourth result winning when the special result is won in an advantageous state.

It should be noted that "said order notifying means, when the lottery result by said lottery means in said normal state is said order result, makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between said first order result and said second order result." On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the order result, if it is the first order result, the order corresponding to the first operation order and if the result is the second order result, the order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed." When the result of the lottery by the means is the result of the order, a special notification is made so as to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the result of the first order and the result of the second order, while in the advantageous state. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result, if the result is the first order result, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed, and if the result is the second order result, the second operation order is performed. It can also be expressed as "to perform the corresponding order notification," and such changes in expression are also applicable to features or feature groups using similar expressions.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the specific order notification is set as an order notification corresponding to an operation order that does not result in the first operation mode.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid the event that the third result winning is established despite following the specific order notification at the time of winning the special result.

Feature H3. A predetermined specific stop operation means is operated for a specific number, and the specific stop operation means is operated at the timing when a specific pattern on the specific orbiting body corresponding to the specific stop operation means exists in a specific range. is the first operation mode, and predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means are operated at the specific number, and the specific stop operation The second operation mode is set so that the means is operated at the specific number and the specific stop operation means is operated at a timing when the specific pattern on the specific loop does not exist in the specific range. has been
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, wherein the specific order notification is set to be the order notification of the operation order in which the predetermined stop operation means is operated at the specific number.

According to the above configuration, since the first operation mode is defined by the operation order and the operation timing, even if the operation order is the first operation mode, if the operation timing is changed, the second operation mode can be used. It is also possible to In other words, when the specific order is notified, depending on the operation timing, it is possible to establish a third result winning or a fourth result winning. If the stopping operation means is operated in accordance with the operation order of the specific order notification, the fourth result winning is always established regardless of the operation timing, and more benefits are obtained when the special result is won in an advantageous state. It is possible to make a configuration that matches the intention.

Feature H4. When the first pattern combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position, the privilege giving means gives a privilege corresponding to the first result, and the privilege giving means gives the privilege corresponding to the fourth result at the valid position. When 4 pattern combinations are stopped, the privilege corresponding to the fourth result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the first pattern combination is a pattern combination that is the same as or corresponds to the fourth pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, the stop roll is common between the case where the first result winning is established based on the order result winning and the case where the fourth result winning is established based on the special result winning. Since the specific order notification notified by the order notification means at the time of winning the special result can be executed also at the time of winning the order result, the winning of the first result and the winning of the fourth result are based on the winning of the order result. It is not possible to determine from the outcome or order announcement whether the result is a result of winning a special result. By doing so, for example, it is possible to predict the setting value from the winning probability of the special result or the winning probability of the sequence result. becomes possible.

It should be noted that "corresponding pattern combination" means that although the pattern combinations that stop at the effective position are different from each other, a specific pattern combination stops at a position different from the effective position. In this case, the position at which the particular symbol combination stops may be different for both results. This point is also applicable to other features and other feature groups using similar expressions.

Feature H5. When the first symbol combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position, the first privilege corresponding to the first result is given by the privilege giving means, and the valid position corresponds to the fourth result. When the fourth pattern combination stops, the fourth privilege corresponding to the fourth result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the first privilege is the same privilege as the fourth privilege.

According to the above configuration, the privilege given is common between the case where the first result winning is established based on the order result winning and the case where the fourth result winning is established based on the special result winning. Since the specific order notification notified by the order notification means at the time of winning the special result can be executed also at the time of winning the order result, the winning of the first result and the winning of the fourth result are based on the winning of the order result. It becomes impossible to determine from the privilege given or the order notification whether it is a thing or is based on a special result winning. By doing so, for example, it is possible to predict the setting value from the winning probability of the special result or the winning probability of the sequence result. becomes possible.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to feature H4 or feature H5, wherein the fourth result is the first result.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature H4 and the feature H5, and by achieving the same results in this way, the excellent effects of the feature H4 and the feature H5 can be expected with an extremely simple configuration.

Feature H7. Order notification corresponding to a plurality of operation orders including the first operation order and the second operation order based on a predetermined trigger (advantageous section transition) at least before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result. Selecting means for selecting order notification corresponding to one operation order from (function for executing notification small winning lottery process by main control device 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein the specific order notification means executes the order notification selected by the selection means by the predetermined notification means as the specific order notification. .

As in the above configuration, if the specific order notification as one predetermined order notification is determined based on a predetermined trigger, while reducing the processing load at the time of winning the special result, it is notified at the time of winning the special result. It becomes possible to secure the randomness of the order notification.

Feature H8. The gaming machine according to feature H7, wherein the predetermined opportunity occurs when the game transitions to the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined opportunity occurs at the time of transition to an advantageous state, there is no inconvenience that the special result is won and the selection is not completed in spite of the situation in which the order notification should be executed, and the factory shipment. The frequency of selection can be made higher than in a configuration in which time is used as a predetermined trigger. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load while ensuring the randomness of the order notification.

In addition, the inventions described in the features H1 to H8 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop operation is performed. When means is operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, a second result (9th minor combination to 32nd The order result (push order bell) that enables the winning of the small role) is set,
Advantage determination means (for example, AT lottery processing at the time of start by the main controller 101, AT lottery processing at the time of stop, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to instruction functions such as AT addition lottery processing),
The advantageous determination means determines that the game state is shifted from the normal state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of start by the main controller 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing),
In the first order result of the order results, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the winning of the first result or the result corresponding to the first result can be established, By operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, the winning of the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be established, and is different from the first order result of the order results. In the second order result, by operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, the winning of the first result or the result corresponding to the first result can be established, while the stop operation means can be operated in the second order result. It is set so that the winning of the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be established by operating in the first operation order,
An order notification means (a function of executing a push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing order notification of the operation order of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal state is the order result, the order notification means makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. while controlling a predetermined notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the order result, if the result is the first order result, an order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed; If the result is the second order result, an order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed;
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, winning of a third result (33rd minor combination) can be established, and the advantage judgment by the advantage judgment means While the first advantageous determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the third result Winning of the fourth result (first small combination to sixth small combination) with a large number of wins can be established, and the advantageous event is generated as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means rather than the first advantageous judgment. A special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment that is unlikely to result in a corresponding advantageous result is executed or the advantageous judgment is not executed,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order as the second operation mode, the winning of the fourth result can be established, and When the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order as the second operation mode, the winning of the fourth result can be established,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, the order notification means selects one operation from order notifications corresponding to a plurality of operation orders including the first operation order and the second operation order. A game machine characterized by comprising selection means for selecting order information corresponding to the order (a function of executing a notification minor winning lottery process by the main controller 101), and executing the order information selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the first result winning can be established, while in the second operation order. There is provided a so-called push order combination in which, when operated, a second result win with fewer benefits than the first result win can be established, and by shifting to an advantageous state, the push order combination of the push order combination is provided. Since the order notification is performed, it is possible to greatly vary the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of the order notification, thereby realizing excellent game characteristics.

As the order result, a first order result and a second order result are set, and the order of operations for winning the first result is different from each other. Then, even in the case of the order result, if it is before the transition to the advantageous state, the order is set to be notified in a manner in which it is impossible to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. Therefore, it is difficult to discriminate the order of operations for winning the first result from the lottery results of each game. By doing so, when the transition to the advantageous state occurs, the degree of advantage is greatly changed by the order notification, and the inconvenience of enjoying the benefit even before the transition can be eliminated.

In addition, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the determination result of the advantage determination corresponds to the occurrence of an advantageous event. While the first advantageous determination that tends to result in an advantageous result is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the fourth result winning, which has more benefits than the third result winning, can be established. A special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment, which is unlikely to result in an advantageous result, is executed as an advantageous judgment, and the player can select the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment or the one with more benefits. You can add gameplay.

In this case, when the special result is won, even if the operation is performed in the first operation order in which the first result wins in the case of the first order result, the first result wins in the case of the second order result. Even if the operation is performed in the second operation order, the second operation mode is set so that the fourth result winning is established.

Here, before transitioning to an advantageous state, it is considered advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode in order to generate an advantageous event as much as possible when winning a special result. It is considered that the operation should be performed in the second operation mode in order to acquire many benefits.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a special result is won in an advantageous state, order notification such as the first operation order or the second operation order is performed to promote establishment of the fourth result winning a prize. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide information for the second operation mode dedicated to the special result in realizing the game property of acquiring more benefits when the special result is won, and the storage capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in the above configuration, as the second operation mode at the time of winning the special combination, the order notification corresponding to one operation order is selected from the first operation order and the second operation order, and the selected order notification is performed. is performed, it is possible to equalize the execution ratio of order notification. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the special result winning being seen through the order notification.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the selection means selects the order information including the order information corresponding to the operation order of the first operation mode.

According to the above configuration, not only the 4th minor winning combination but also the 3rd minor winning combination may be established by the notification of the order when the special result is won. By doing so, it is possible to include the achievement of the third minor winning combination and the establishment of the fourth minor winning combination in the game characteristics, and it is possible to more preferably equalize the order notification. becomes.

Feature I3. A plurality of setting values are set that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. Means (a function of executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101),
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means, the selection means is in the first operation mode. The game machine according to feature I2, characterized in that the ratio of selecting the order information corresponding to the operation order is different.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the third result instead of the fourth result may win despite the fact that the operation is performed according to the order notification, if the third result wins, there are few benefits, but the setting This is the case when it becomes possible to use it as a material for predicting the value, and rather it can be a favorable event for the player. In this way, the occurrence rate of each order notification is equalized by selecting the order notification including the order notification of the first operation mode, and the order notification of the first operation mode is selected. It is possible to follow up well the point at which the player may be disadvantaged.

Feature I4. When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means, the selection means is in the first operation mode. The difference in the ratio of selecting the order notification corresponding to the operation order is the ratio of the selection means selecting the predetermined order notification when the first setting value is set and the other order notification The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the difference is greater than the difference between the percentage selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, while the occurrence rate of each order notification is equalized, the difference in the selection rate of each order notification is larger than the setting difference of the selection rate of the order notification that is the first operation mode. It becomes easy to play a game in which the set value is predicted from the order notification which is the first operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to well follow up on the disappointment that the third minor combination win is established and the prize is small due to the order notification that is the first operation mode.

Feature I5. the operation order has a certain number of types, which is plural;
The game according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the selection means selects at least the operation orders other than the predetermined operation order so that the selection rates of the operation orders other than the predetermined operation order are uniform. machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the operation order is not divisible by 100%, the selection rate is equalized at least for other operation orders than the predetermined operation order. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform order notification more evenly.

Feature I6. A plurality of setting values are set that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. Means (a function of executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101),
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means, the predetermined order notification is set. The gaming machine according to feature I5, characterized in that order information is different.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to predict the setting value by using the remainder of the selection rate which is not divisible by 100%. As a result, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such as predicting the set value by making good use of the part where the order notification cannot be completely equalized while trying to equalize the order notification. Become.

Feature I7. The specific number of set values are set that are capable of causing a change in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and one set value among the specified number of set values is set. Setting means for setting (function for executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101),
The gaming machine according to feature I5 or feature I6, wherein the order information set as the predetermined order information differs according to the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to predict the setting value by using the remainder of the selection rate which is not divisible by 100%. As a result, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such as predicting the set value by making good use of the part where the order notification cannot be completely equalized while trying to equalize the order notification. Become.

Feature I8. The selection means selects the order notification without including the order notification corresponding to the operation order that is the first operation mode, or selects the operation that is the first operation mode rather than the order notification corresponding to another operation order. The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that it is difficult to select an order notification corresponding to the order.

According to the above configuration, if the order notification at the time of winning the special result is followed, the fourth minor winning combination will be established, and the third minor winning combination will not be established. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily acquire many privileges in an advantageous state.

Feature I9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (push order bell), a result corresponding to the special result (first small Winning of a winning combination, second minor winning combination) can be established, and the stop operation means is operated in an operation order that does not correspond to the first operation mode, resulting in a result corresponding to the special result It is set so that the winning of 6 small roles) can be established,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the frequency of execution of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the order notification corresponding to the operation order of the first operation mode. The game machine according to feature I8, characterized in that the order notification is set to be higher than the order notification corresponding to the operation order that does not constitute one operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the order notification corresponding to the operation order of the first operation mode is not performed when the special result is won, but the order notification when the special result is won can cover well. By doing so, it is possible to equalize the order notification throughout the game.

Feature I10. A predetermined specific stop operation means is operated for a specific number, and the specific stop operation means is operated at a timing when a specific pattern on the specific orbiting body corresponding to the specific stop operation means exists in a specific range. is the first operation mode, and a predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means is operated at the specific number, and the specific stop operation The second operation mode is set so that the means is operated at the specific number and the specific stop operation means is operated at a timing when the specific pattern on the specific loop does not exist in the specific range. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, since the first operation mode is defined by the operation order and the operation timing, even if the operation order is the first operation mode, if the operation timing is changed, the second operation mode can be used. It is also possible to In other words, in the configuration in which the operation order corresponding to the operation order of the first operation mode is included in the selection, when the order of the operation order of the first operation mode is notified, the third result wins depending on the operation timing. It is established or the 4th result prize is established. Therefore, if it is desired to acquire more benefits, it is necessary to make full use of the operation timing.

Feature I11. The selection means selects a plurality of operation orders including the first operation order and the second operation order based on a predetermined opportunity (advantageous section transition) at least before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result. select an order notification corresponding to one operation order from the order notifications corresponding to
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I10, wherein the order notification means executes the order notification selected at the predetermined trigger when the special result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to significantly reduce the processing load compared to the configuration in which the operation order is selected each time a special result is won.

Feature I12. The gaming machine according to feature I11, wherein the predetermined opportunity occurs when the game transitions to the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined opportunity occurs at the time of transition to an advantageous state, there is no inconvenience that the special result is won and the selection is not completed in spite of the situation in which the order notification should be executed, and the special result. Although the frequency of selection is lower than that for each winning, for example, the frequency of selection can be increased for a configuration with a predetermined trigger at the time of shipment from the factory. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load while ensuring the randomness of the order notification.

In addition, the invention described in the features I1 to I12 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features I1 to I12, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop operation is performed. When means is operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, a second result (9th minor combination to 32nd The order result (push order bell) that enables the winning of the small role) is set,
Advantage determination means (for example, AT lottery processing at the time of start by the main controller 101, AT lottery processing at the time of stop, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to instruction functions such as AT addition lottery processing),
The advantageous determination means determines that the game state is shifted from the normal state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of start by the main controller 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing),
In the first order result of the order results, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the winning of the first result or the result corresponding to the first result can be established, By operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, the winning of the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be established, and is different from the first order result of the order results. In the second order result, by operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, the winning of the first result or the result corresponding to the first result can be established, while the stop operation means can be operated in the second order result. It is set so that the winning of the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be established by operating in the first operation order,
An order notification means (a function of executing a push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing order notification of the operation order of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal state is the order result, the order notification means makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. while controlling a predetermined notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the order result, if the result is the first order result, an order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed; If the result is the second order result, an order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed;
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, winning of a third result (33rd minor combination) can be established, and the advantage judgment by the advantage judgment means While the first advantageous determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the third result It is possible to establish a fourth result (first small combination to sixth small combination) with a large number of wins, and the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means corresponds to generating the advantageous event more than the first advantageous determination. A special result (special combination) is set in which the second advantageous judgment is executed or the advantageous judgment is not executed,
At least the operation of the stop operation means in the first operation order is included in the second operation mode,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, the specific order notification means (special A game machine characterized in that it has a function of executing notification of the pressing order when a winning combination is won.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the first result winning can be established, while in the second operation order. There is provided a so-called push order combination in which, when operated, a second result win with fewer benefits than the first result win can be established, and by shifting to an advantageous state, the push order combination of the push order combination is provided. Since the order notification is performed, it is possible to greatly vary the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of the order notification, thereby realizing excellent game characteristics.

As the order result, a first order result and a second order result are set, and the order of operations for winning the first result is different from each other. Then, even in the case of the order result, if it is before the transition to the advantageous state, the order is set to be notified in a manner in which it is impossible to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. Therefore, it is difficult to discriminate the order of operations for winning the first result from the lottery results of each game. By doing so, when the transition to the advantageous state occurs, the degree of advantage is greatly changed by the order notification, and the inconvenience of enjoying the benefit even before the transition can be eliminated.

In addition, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the determination result of the advantage determination corresponds to the occurrence of an advantageous event. While the first advantageous determination that tends to result in an advantageous result is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the fourth result winning, which has more benefits than the third result winning, can be established. A special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment, which is unlikely to result in an advantageous result, is executed as an advantageous judgment, and the player can select the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment or the one with more benefits. You can add gameplay.

Moreover, the second operation mode when the special result is won is a mode including the first operation order, and by using the configuration, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is performed when the special result is won during the advantageous state. I'm trying This eliminates the need to use the existing configuration such as the sequence notification in the sequence result to provide notification exclusively for the special result when operating in the second operation mode in order to acquire more benefits when the special result is won. Moreover, since it is possible to skillfully mix the special result winning with the first order result when the order result wins, for example, it is possible to predict the setting value from the winning probability of the special result or the winning probability of the order result. In the configuration, it is also possible to make the prediction difficult. As a result of the above, it is possible to easily improve the interest in the game.

Feature J2. When the first pattern combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position, the privilege giving means gives a privilege corresponding to the first result, and the privilege giving means gives the privilege corresponding to the fourth result at the valid position. When 4 pattern combinations are stopped, the privilege corresponding to the fourth result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the first pattern combination is a pattern combination that is the same as or corresponds to the fourth pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, the stop roll is common between the case where the first result winning is established based on the order result winning and the case where the fourth result winning is established based on the special result winning. Since the specific order notification notified by the order notification means at the time of winning the special result can be executed also at the time of winning the order result, the winning of the first result and the winning of the fourth result are based on the winning of the order result. It is not possible to determine from the outcome or order announcement whether the result is a result of winning a special result. By doing so, for example, it is possible to predict the setting value from the winning probability of the special result or the winning probability of the sequence result. becomes possible.

Feature J3. In the first order result, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the winning of the first result associated with the first order result can be established, while the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order, the winning of the second result associated with the first order result can be established, and in the second order result, the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order While the winning of the first result associated with the second order result can be established by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the second order result is set so that the winning of the second result associated with can be established,
When the symbol combination corresponding to the first result associated with the first order result stops at the effective position among the first symbol combinations corresponding to the first result, the privilege corresponding to the result is provided. When a fourth pattern combination corresponding to the fourth result is granted by the privilege granting means and stops at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the fourth result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the symbol combination corresponding to the first result associated with the first order result is the same as or corresponding to the fourth symbol combination.

The above configuration is a specific configuration in which, in feature J2, a result corresponding to the first result is won according to each operation order when an order result is won, but strictly speaking, different results are won in each operation order. Configuration. In such a configuration as well, by making common the stop roll of the fourth result prize when the special result is won and the stop roll of the result prize corresponding to the first result when the order result is won, the special result can be displayed in order. It is possible to enhance the effect of being well confused with the result.

Feature J4. When the first symbol combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position, the first privilege corresponding to the first result is given by the privilege giving means, and the valid position corresponds to the fourth result. When the fourth pattern combination stops, the fourth privilege corresponding to the fourth result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the first benefit is the same benefit as the fourth benefit.

According to the above configuration, the privilege given is common between the case where the first result winning is established based on the order result winning and the case where the fourth result winning is established based on the special result winning. Since the specific order notification notified by the order notification means at the time of winning the special result can be executed also at the time of winning the order result, the winning of the first result and the winning of the fourth result are based on the winning of the order result. It becomes impossible to determine from the privilege given or the order notification whether it is a thing or is based on a special result winning. By doing so, for example, it is possible to predict the setting value from the winning probability of the special result or the winning probability of the sequence result. becomes possible.

Feature J5. The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J4, wherein the fourth result is the first result.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of features J2 to J4, and by achieving the same results in this way, excellent effects of features J2 to J4 can be expected with an extremely simple configuration.

Feature J6. A notification mode of order notification corresponding to the first operation order executed by the order notification means triggered by the order result, and the first operation order executed by the specific order notification means triggered by the special result The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the notification mode of the corresponding order notification is a common notification mode.

According to the above configuration, the order notification of the first operation order in the order result and the order notification of the first operation order in the special result are executed in the same notification mode. Also from the notification mode, the effect of blending the special result with the order result can be expected.

Feature J7. When the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the first order result, specific information, which is information about the first operation order or information indicating that it is the first order result, is sent to another control device (display a first output means capable of outputting to the control device 81) (a function of executing processing for outputting and setting a push order command for the sixth minor combination when the push order bell is won by the main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, a second output means capable of outputting the specific information to the other control device (push order bell winning by main control device 101 A function to output and set the push order command for the 6th minor role at times),
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the order notification of the first operation order is performed when the order result is won, the specific information, which is the information about the first operation order and the information that the result is the first order result, is sent to other control devices. In the configuration where the order is output, even if the order notification of the first operation order is performed when the special result is won, the specific information is output to the other control device, so not only the order notification but also the specific information Even if it is analyzed illegally, it cannot be determined whether it is a sequence result or a special result. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it difficult for an act or the like to obtain a profit by judging the result illegally.

Feature J8. The other control device includes a specific notification means (an auxiliary display unit 65 or a speaker 64) for executing a specific notification (push order notification) corresponding to the first operation order based on the specific information. a function of executing a press order notification effect by the display control device 81),
The specific notification means executes the specific notification in a common notification mode when the specific information is output triggered by the order result and when the specific information is output triggered by the special result. The gaming machine according to feature J7, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it becomes impossible to determine whether the specific notification by the specific notification means is triggered by the sequence result or the special result, and the effect of the feature J1 is more suitable. It becomes possible to play in

Feature J9. The probability of obtaining the advantageous result in the advantageous determination based on the order result or the degree of advantage of the advantageous event when the advantageous result is obtained, and the probability of obtaining the advantageous result in the advantageous determination based on the special result, or The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, wherein the advantage degree of the advantageous event when the advantageous result is obtained is different.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probability and the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment based on the order result are different from the winning probability and the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment based on the special result winning, the order notification when the special result is won is changed in the order of the order result. By using the notification, the special result winning is confused with the order notification, so that the advantageous event occurs based on the order result is made to think that the advantageous event will occur based on the special result, or conversely, the special result It can be made to believe that an advantageous event will occur based on the order result.

Feature J10. The probability of obtaining the advantageous result in the advantageous determination based on the special result is higher than the probability of obtaining the advantageous result in the advantageous determination based on the order result or the degree of advantage of the advantageous event when the advantageous result is obtained. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to characteristic J9, wherein the advantage of the advantageous event is higher when the advantageous result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to give the impression that an advantageous event will occur based on the order result, as opposed to the advantageous event occurring based on the special result. In other words, it is possible to give the player the impression that the order result can be a powerful trigger for an advantageous event, not just a function that differentiates the privilege to be given depending on the presence or absence of the order notification. Interest can be greatly enhanced.

Feature J11. The gaming machine according to feature J10, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result is higher than the probability that the order result will be the special result.

As in the above configuration, the order result is easier to win than the special result, so normally, if such an order result is used as a trigger for an advantageous event, inconvenience such as a sharp increase in the ball payout rate may occur. . In that respect, as in the features J1 and J10, special results are used to increase expectations for advantageous events in order results, so that it is easier to win while avoiding a rise in the ball payout rate. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the order result.

In addition, the inventions described in the features J1 to J11 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features J1 to J11, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
Advantage determination means (for example, AT lottery processing at the time of start by the main controller 101, AT lottery processing at the time of stop, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to instruction functions such as AT addition lottery processing),
The advantageous determination means determines that the game state is shifted from the normal state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of start by the main controller 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing),
When the number of games played from a predetermined opportunity (advantage zone transition) reaches a specific number of games, it corresponds to the transition to the advantageous state without going through the transition determination by the transition determination means or the result of the transition determination. Even if the result is different from the transition result, specific transition means for executing the transition process for transitioning to the advantageous state (the AT mode winning flag is set based on the ceiling counter being 0 by the main controller 101) function to execute processing to
grasping means for grasping the number-of-games information corresponding to the number of games from a predetermined trigger (function for executing processing for grasping the ceiling counter by the main control device 101);
Updating means for updating the number-of-games information according to the progress of the game from the predetermined trigger (function for performing subtraction processing from the ceiling counter by the main control device 101);
The number of games from the predetermined trigger is notified by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as game number notification, and game number notification means (display control device 81) for updating the game number notification according to the progress of the game A function to display an advantageous section game number image AP),
When a specific condition (operating in the second operation mode when winning a special role, limiting the special role) is established in the game from the predetermined opportunity, the updating of the number of games information by the updating means is restricted or the updating Specific processing means (special role winning game by main controller 101) for executing specific processing that makes it more difficult for the game number information to become specific information (ceiling counter = 0) corresponding to the specific game number than when updating is performed by the means a function of executing processing for not performing subtraction of the ceiling counter when operated in the second operation mode with );
with
The specific transition means is configured to execute the transition process when the number-of-games information becomes the specific information,
The game number notification means updates the game number notification even in a game in which the specific processing is performed by the specific processing means,
When the number-of-games notification by the number-of-games notification means becomes notification corresponding to the specific number of games, and when the number of games until the number-of-games information becomes the specific information is equal to or less than a specific number, a first specific Notification (first precursor mode effect) is executed by the predetermined notification means or notification means different therefrom, and when the number of games played until the game number information becomes the specific information is greater than the specific number, the A second specific notification (third precursor mode effect) different from the first specific notification can be executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the specific notification means (stop-time precursor effect setting processing by the display control device 81 A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to execute

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is given, a transition judgment is made to shift to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as an advantage judgment according to the result of the lottery, and the number of games from a predetermined trigger may shift to an advantageous state by reaching a specific number of games. In other words, in addition to the lottery of each game, in addition to the game property aiming for an advantageous state, when the number of games reaches a specific number of games, a so-called ceiling is provided to move to an advantageous state without going through the transition determination. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game in the middle and to encourage the continuation of the game.

In the above configuration, if a specific condition is satisfied in a game from a predetermined trigger, updating of the game number information corresponding to the number of games may be restricted, while notification of the number of games indicating the number of games from the predetermined trigger is specified. Since the update is performed even if the conditions are met, the game number information side does not reach the specific information corresponding to the ceiling even though the number of games notification side has reached the specific number of games corresponding to the ceiling. can occur.

When such an event occurs, the player expects that the process for transitioning to an advantageous state will be performed by reaching the specified number of games, but it is not performed. It is undeniable that the player may feel uneasy and end the game even though he or she has played the game so far.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the number of games notification reaches the specific number of games, the number of games played until the number of games information reaches the specific information is grasped, and if the number of games is less than or equal to the specific number, the first specific notification If the number is greater than the specific number, the second specific notification is executed, so that the user can understand that the previous game was not in vain, and how long it will take to reach the ceiling. It is possible to grasp from Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature K2. If the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, means for transitioning to the advantageous state after executing a predetermined number of games (a function of executing a precursor game number setting process by the main controller 101) )and,
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the special notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means in the game until the transition to the advantageous state. means (a function of executing a start-time portent effect setting process by the display control device 81);
with
The special notification means executes the first special notification as the special notification when the predetermined number of games is equal to or less than the specific number, and executes the first special notification as the special notification when the predetermined number of games is greater than the specific number. Execute a second special notification different from the 1 special notification,
The notification mode of the first specific notification executed by the specific notification means is the same as the notification mode of the first special notification executed by the special notification means, or the notification mode of the first special notification. It is set to be a notification mode that is difficult for the player to identify, and the notification mode of the second specific notification executed by the specific notification means is the second special notification executed by the special notification means. The gaming machine according to feature K1, characterized in that it is set so that the notification mode is the same as the notification mode, or the notification mode is set to be difficult for the player to distinguish from the notification mode of the second special notification.

According to the above configuration, when the number of games notification reaches the specific number of games and the specific notification is performed, it looks like a special notification in the case of winning in the transition determination before reaching the specific number of games and shifting to an advantageous state Specific notification is performed in the same notification mode. By doing so, there is no need to store the data of the notification mode separately as the specific notification for reaching the ceiling, so that the memory capacity can be reduced, and the player can see how long it will take to reach an advantage. It is possible to clearly grasp whether to migrate.

Feature K3. A first advantageous state (AT mode) and a second advantageous state (CZ mode) more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are set as the advantageous state,
The specific transition means is configured to transition to the first advantageous state,
The special notification means is a result corresponding to the transition determination result by the transition determination means to shift to the first advantageous state, and when the predetermined number of games is greater than the specific number, the special notification is made. and the second special notification is executed as above, and the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a result corresponding to the transition to the second advantageous state, and when the predetermined number of games is greater than the specific number , a gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein a third special notification different from the second special notification is executed as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, after the game notification reaches the specific number of games, the notification mode of the second specific notification executed when the number of games up to the ceiling is greater than the specific number is usually advantageous. The notification mode is the same as the notification mode of the second special notification executed when the transition to the first advantageous state occurs. In this way, the player's impatience and frustration that the transition to the advantageous state does not take place despite reaching the ceiling on the display can be resolved by notifying the player that the transition to the first advantageous state is confirmed (the first 2 specific notification, 2nd special notification) can be well followed, and the player's feelings can be relieved until the transition to the first advantageous state occurs.

Feature K4. As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result (33rd minor combination) can be established, and the advantage judgment by the advantage judgment means While the first advantageous determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the first result It is possible to establish the winning of the second result (first small combination to sixth small combination) with a large number of wins, and to cause the advantageous event to occur as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means rather than the first advantageous judgment. A special result (special combination) is set in which the second advantageous judgment is executed or the advantageous judgment is not executed,
The specific processing means can execute the specific processing by determining that the specific condition is satisfied that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, and the determination result of the advantageous determination becomes an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event. While the first advantageous determination that is easy is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second result winning, which has more benefits than the first result winning, can be established. A special result is set in which the second advantageous judgment that is unlikely to result in an advantageous result is executed, and the player can select the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment or the one with the greater number of benefits. can be added.

Moreover, if the second operation mode is operated when the special result is won, the specific processing for restricting the update of the number-of-games information is executed. Instead, the current game does not contribute to the number of games up to the ceiling. In other words, even if the player wants to obtain the second privilege, operating in the second operation mode is disadvantageous for the player in terms of the game property of shifting to an advantageous state.

However, there may be players who do not understand the distinction between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, and players who are unable to distinguish between these operation modes on purpose, and a game in which the second privilege is obtained. is a player's choice, and the provision of such a special result tends to cause discrepancies between the displayed number of games played up to the ceiling and the actual number of games played.

Therefore, if the specific notification is performed according to the actual number of games up to the ceiling when the number of games notification reaches the specific number of games as in the above feature K1, a variety of games due to such special results can be achieved. It is possible to expect excellent effects such as letting the player understand that the game will soon reach the ceiling and grasping the number of games played up to the ceiling from the specific notification while obtaining the effect of speeding up.

Feature K5. If the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, means for transitioning to the advantageous state after executing a predetermined number of games (a function of executing a precursor game number setting process by the main controller 101) )and,
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the special notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means in the game until the transition to the advantageous state. means (a function of executing a start-time portent effect setting process by the display control device 81);
with
When the specific process is performed based on the average number of times that the lottery result by the lottery means when the specific number of games is played is the special result, and the specific process is not performed based on the special result Characteristic K4, characterized in that the product of the average difference between the number of updates from the number-of-games information updated by the update means and the number of updates is set to be equal to or less than the maximum number of the predetermined number of games. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, even if the operation is performed in the second operation mode every time, the actual number of games up to the ceiling when the game number notification reaches the specific game number is The number of games to be played is likely to be within the predetermined number at which the special notification is made in the case of winning in the normal transition determination. By doing so, even if the configuration is such that the specific notification is started when the ceiling on the display is reached, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of slackness such as the specific notification being performed for too long. In a configuration such as K2 in which the notification mode of the special notification is diverted to the specific notification, it is also possible to perform the diversion extremely smoothly.

Feature K6. The specific transition means is configured to execute the transition process so as to transition to the advantageous state after playing a specific number of games from the game in which the game number information is the specific information,
When the specific process is performed based on the average number of times that the lottery result by the lottery means when the specific number of games is played is the special result, and the specific process is not performed based on the special result The number of games obtained by adding the specific number of games to the product of the number of updates from the number of games information updated by the updating means in the case and the average difference between them is set so that the number of games is equal to or less than the maximum number of the predetermined number of games. The gaming machine according to feature K5, characterized in that it is set to .

According to the above configuration, when the ceiling is reached, the state is shifted to an advantageous state after playing a specific number of games. Even if it is operated, when the game number notification reaches the specific number of games, the actual number of games up to the ceiling is a predetermined game in which special notification is performed when the winning is determined by the normal transition determination It becomes easy to become within a few. Therefore, after reaching the ceiling, after setting the grace period for performing effects etc. until the transition to the advantageous section as the specific number of games, even if the specific number of games exceeds the ceiling on the display as it is, the above effect is obtained can be expected. By doing so, it is possible to optimize the presentation up to the transition to the advantageous state without causing complicated processing or an increase in the amount of data.

Feature K7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the update means determines that the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the special result. Characteristic features K4 to K6 characterized in that it is possible to update the number-of-games information so that when the number-of-games information is updated, the difference is larger than the difference before and after the update. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, by operating in the first operation mode when winning the special result, it is possible to update the number-of-games information to a greater extent than in the case of other lottery results. Therefore, when the special result is won, the first operation mode is operated to hasten the ceiling arrival, while the second operation mode is operated to delay the ceiling arrival. results in two extremes. Therefore, it is possible to have the player perform the operation mode more carefully when the special result is won, and it is possible to greatly contribute to improving the interest in the game.

Feature K8. The second operation mode is characterized in that the operation difficulty level is lower than that of the first operation mode (the first operation mode requires full use of the operation timing in addition to the operation order). The game machine according to feature K7.

According to the above configuration, if the operation mode is not fully utilized, the second operation mode is likely to be used when winning a special result, and the specific processing tends to cause a discrepancy between reaching the ceiling on the display and reaching the actual ceiling. Therefore, it is considered highly significant to employ a configuration like the feature K1 for such a configuration.

Feature K9. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
Advantage determination means (for example, AT lottery processing at the time of start by the main controller 101, AT lottery processing at the time of stop, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to instruction functions such as AT addition lottery processing),
The advantageous determination means determines that the game state is shifted from the normal state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of start by the main controller 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing),
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition result corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state, a special notification is made by a predetermined notification means in the game until the transition to the advantageous state. Special notification means for executing
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result (33rd minor combination) can be established, and the transition determination by the transition determination means While the first transition determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the first result A second result (first small combination to sixth small combination) can be established, and a second transition determination that is less likely to be the transition result than the first transition determination as the transition determination by the transition determination means. is executed or a special result (special role) is set in which the transition judgment is not executed,
When the number of games played from a predetermined opportunity (advantageous section transition) reaches the specific number of games, the result of the transition determination is different from the transition result without going through the transition determination by the transition determination means Also, specific transition means for executing transition processing for transitioning to the advantageous state (function for executing processing for setting the AT mode winning flag based on the ceiling counter being 0 by the main controller 101);
grasping means for grasping the number-of-games information corresponding to the number of games from a predetermined trigger (function for executing processing for grasping the ceiling counter by the main control device 101);
updating means for updating the number-of-games information in accordance with the progress of the game from the predetermined trigger (function for executing subtraction processing of the ceiling counter by the main control device 101);
The number of games from the predetermined trigger is notified by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as game number notification, and the game number notification means (display control device 81) updates the game number notification according to the progress of the game A function to display an advantageous section game number image AP),
with
The specific transition means is configured to execute the transition process when the number-of-games information becomes specific information corresponding to the specific number of games,
The game number notification means updates the game number notification even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the game is a game in which the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode,
The special notification means can execute a first special notification (first precursor mode effect) and a second special notification (third precursor mode effect) as the special notification, and the advantageous state to be shifted to has a high degree of advantage. As much as possible, it is a configuration that makes it easier to execute the second special notification than the first special notification,
By operating the stop operation means in the second operation mode in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the game number notification by the game number notification means corresponds to the specific game number. A gaming machine characterized in that when the notification is made, the second special notification is likely to be executed by the special notification means.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is given, a transition judgment is made to shift to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as an advantage judgment according to the result of the lottery, and the number of games from a predetermined trigger may shift to an advantageous state by reaching a specific number of games. In other words, in addition to the lottery of each game, in addition to the game property aiming for an advantageous state, when the number of games reaches a specific number of games, a so-called ceiling is provided to move to an advantageous state without going through the transition determination. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game in the middle and to encourage the continuation of the game.

Furthermore, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, and the determination result of the transition determination is likely to be a transition result that causes a transition to an advantageous state. is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, although the second result winning with more benefits than the first result winning can be established, the transition determination is less likely to result in the transition result. A special result is set for execution of 2 transition judgment, and the player can select the degree of advantage of the transition judgment or select the one with the greater number of benefits, thereby adding extremely special game characteristics. .

In this case, in order to cause a transition to an advantageous state, it is considered that the player should operate in the first operation mode when winning a special result. If a special result is provided in a game that aims to shift to an advantageous state, it is difficult to ensure the fairness of the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the player is operated in the second operation mode when the special result is won, the second special notification corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state when reaching the ceiling is facilitated to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to successfully follow up a player who erroneously operates in the second operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K8 individually to the feature K9, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. can also be applied in combination.

In addition, the inventions described in the features K1 to K9 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features K1 to K9, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop When the operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result (9th minor combination ~ 32nd small combination) has been set as a result (push order bell) that can be established,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (press by main controller 101) for executing mode notification of the operation mode including either the first operation mode or the second operation mode function to execute forward notification) and
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
with
As game states, there are a specific state (advantageous section) in which mode notification by the mode notification means can be performed, and a normal state in which mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be performed or is less likely to be performed than in the specific state. State (normal section) and are set,
The specific processing means includes, as the specific processing, transition determination means (a function of executing an advantageous section transition lottery process by the main controller 101) for executing a transition determination for transition from the normal state to the specific state,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, winning of a third result (33rd minor combination) can be established, and the transition determination by the transition determination means While the first transition determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the third result The fourth result (first small combination to sixth small combination) can be established, and the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the specific state rather than the first transition determination. A special result (special role) is set in which the second transition determination that is unlikely to result in the corresponding transition result is executed or the transition determination is not executed,
The transition determination means determines that the specific state is more advantageous when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result (specific combination) than when the lottery result is a specific result (specific combination). A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to shift to an advantageous section that reaches ).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, while the second operation mode can be established. When operated by , a so-called push order role is provided in which a second result win with fewer benefits than the first result win can be established, and by shifting to a specific state, the push order of the push order role Since the mode notification is performed as the notification, it is possible to greatly vary the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby realizing excellent game characteristics.

In addition, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the first transition determination is executed as a transition determination to the specific state. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, although it is possible to establish the fourth result winning that has more benefits than the third result winning, the transition determination is to a specific state rather than the first transition determination. A second transition determination that is unlikely to result in a transition result corresponding to the transition or a special result in which the transition determination is not executed is set. It is possible to add a very special game feature such as which one to choose.

The transition to the specific state in which mode notification can be executed is made when the transition determination by the transition determination means of the specific processing results in a transition result. It tends to result in a transition to a more advantageous specific state than when it is executed with the predetermined result winning as a trigger.

Then, as described above, by utilizing the fact that the contents of the transition determination and the benefits obtained differ depending on the operation mode at the time of winning the special result, the user can obtain the second benefit by operating in the second operation mode at the time of winning the special result. However, it is possible to prevent the transition to the specific state from occurring, and to prevent the transition to the specific state from occurring until the lottery result reaches the specific result. It can greatly contribute to diversification.

Feature L2. The transition determining means makes it easier for the player to shift to the specific state when it shifts to the specific state based on the specific result than when it shifts to the specific state based on the special result. The gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the significance of waiting for the winning of the specific result without shifting to the specific state when winning the special result is made clearer. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the special game characteristics of the feature L1.

Feature L3. Setting means (function for setting the number of ceiling games by the main controller 101) for setting the advantage of the specific state to be transitioned when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result. ,
The feature L1 or the feature characterized in that the setting means facilitates setting such that the specific state to which the transition is made based on the result of the identification is more advantageous than the specific state to which the transition is made based on the predetermined result. The gaming machine described in L2.

As in the above configuration, by providing the setting means separately from the migration determination means, the functions can be distributed to each means, and the occurrence of errors due to an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

Feature L4. A game value necessary for executing a game is set as a specific number (three cards),
Any one of features L1 to L3, characterized in that the privilege given when the fourth result is won is equivalent to a gaming value (eight pieces) that is twice or more of the specific number. game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the second operation mode is operated in the game in which the special result is won, and the result of the transition determination is the transition result, even if the stick is swung, the game required in the game Since the value and the game value more than the game value required in the next game can be acquired, the game is hardly wasted, and rather, the game property of waiting for the specific result of the feature L1 is realized without considering the reduction of the game value. can be made

Feature L5. When the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific state is the special result, the first specific process is executed as the specific process when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, When the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is not executed. is the configuration,
The third result and the fourth result are won so that the player operates the stop operation means in the first operation mode more advantageous than the player operates in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein a special benefit, the first specific process, and the second specific process are set.

According to the above configuration, after the transition to the specific state, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode than to operate in the second operation mode when the special result is won. By doing so, the special result winning before the transition to the specific state is operated in the second operation mode, and the special result winning after the transition to the specific state is operated in the first operation mode. It is possible to realize a very special game property that recommends the opposite operation. Therefore, by using such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the game.

Feature L6. As the specific state, a first specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is likely to be performed, and a mode notification by the mode notification means is less likely to be performed or not performed than in the first specific state. A second specific state (normal mode) is set,
Specific transition determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main control unit 101) for executing transition determination for transition from the second specific state to the first specific state prepared,
The first specific process and the second specific process include transition determination by the specific transition determination means,
When the first specific process is executed as the transition judgment by the specific transition judging means, the specific transition result of shifting to the first specific state is more pronounced than when the second specific process is executed. The game machine according to feature L5, which is characterized by having an easy configuration.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature L5.

Feature L7. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop When the operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result (9th minor combination ~ 32nd small combination) has been set as a result (push order bell) that can be established,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (press by main controller 101) for executing mode notification of the operation mode including either the first operation mode or the second operation mode function to execute forward notification) and
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
with
As game states, there are a specific state (advantageous section) in which mode notification by the mode notification means can be performed, and a normal state in which mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be performed or is less likely to be performed than in the specific state. State (normal section) and are set,
Transition determination means (function for executing advantageous section transition lottery processing by main controller 101) for executing transition determination for transition from the normal state to the specific state;
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, winning of a third result (33rd minor winning combination) can be established, and as the specific process by the specific processing means While the first specifying process is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the third result Winning of the fourth result (first small combination to sixth small combination) with a large number of wins can be established, and the specific processing by the specific processing means is more disadvantageous for the player than the first specific processing. A special result (special role) is set in which the second specific process is executed or the specific process is not executed,
The transition determination means determines that the specific state is more advantageous when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result (specific combination) than when the lottery result is a specific result (specific combination). Advantageous section to reach), and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the transition determination is performed regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, while the second operation mode can be established. When operated by , a so-called push order role is provided in which a second result win with fewer benefits than the first result win can be established, and by shifting to a specific state, the push order of the push order role Since the mode notification is performed as the notification, it is possible to greatly vary the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby realizing excellent game characteristics.

After that, as the lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the determination of transition to the specific state and the advantage of the specific state are set. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, it is possible to achieve the fourth result winning with more benefits than the third result winning. However, as the specific process, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed, or a special result in which the specific process is not executed is set, and the player can shift to the specific state. It is possible to add a very special game feature such as selecting the , or selecting the one with more benefits.

When the transition determination by the transition determination means results in a transition result, the transition to the specific state in which mode notification can be performed is performed. is likely to result in a transition to a particular state that is more advantageous than if it were executed as

Then, by utilizing the fact that the details of the specific process and the benefits that can be obtained differ depending on the operation mode at the time of winning the special result as described above, the user can obtain the second benefit by operating in the second operation mode at the time of winning the special result. However, it is also possible to play a game in which the transition to the specific state is not caused, and the transition to the specific state is not caused until the lottery result becomes the specific result.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in the transition determination based on the special result, the transition determination is executed regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means, so that the transition to the specific state is performed while acquiring the second privilege as described above. It is possible to prevent people from performing actions such as avoiding Therefore, the fairness of the game can be favorably ensured.

It should be noted that the inventions described in the features L1 to L7 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features J1 to J8, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
with
The specific processing means executes a first specific process as the specific process when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is executed. is set not to run
As the special result, a first special result (special role A) and a second special result (special role B) different from the first special result are set,
The first operation mode (operation mode in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first) for the first special result is set to be the second operation mode for the second special result, and the second A gaming machine characterized in that the first operation mode (the operation mode in which the middle stop switch 43 is operated first) for the special result is set to be the second operation mode for the first special result. .

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided, and as a specific process related to the mode notification function While the first specifying process is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given, and the second specifying process is executed as the specifying process related to the mode notification function. A special result is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, the first specific process is more advantageous to the player than the second specific process, so the special result In this case, it is novel that the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the mode notification function (first operation mode). It is possible to realize a great playability.

Moreover, in the above configuration, a plurality of special results are provided, the first operation mode for the first special result is the second operation mode for the second special result, and the first operation mode for the second special result is the first special result. Since the result is set to be the second operation mode, even a player who continues to play the game in the first operation mode for the first special result can perform the first operation mode for the first special result. In addition to the benefit of the second special result, the player can enjoy the benefit of the second operation mode of the second special result. Also, it is possible for the player to enjoy not only the benefit of the second operation mode in the first special result, but also the benefit of the first operation mode in the second special result. Therefore, while ensuring fairness among players, it is possible to create novel gameplay using the above-mentioned special results.

Feature M2. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, the first specific notification corresponding to the first operation mode for the first special result (the order of pressing when winning a special role in normal mode or CZ mode notification effect) is executed by a predetermined notification means, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, the first specific notification (normal 1st specific notification means (the AT mode flag is set in the process corresponding to the lottery result by the main controller 101) that executes the pressing order notification effect when winning a special role in the mode or CZ mode) by a predetermined notification means. A function to execute processing for outputting a push order notification command when winning a special combination A to C in a situation where there is no special combination, and a function to execute processing for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature M1.

According to the above configuration, even though the game is premised on a game in which a plurality of special results are provided and the operation is performed not only in the first operation mode but also in the second operation mode, when the first special result is won, the player changes to the first operation mode. It is also possible to play a game in which the player is operated in the second special result and operated in the first operation mode when the second special result is won. By doing so, it is possible to realize a plurality of game features in one gaming machine, and since it is up to the player whether or not to follow the notification by the first specific notification means, when the special result is won, the first It is also possible for the player to select whether to play a game in which the operation is performed not only in the operation mode but also in the second operation mode, or whether to perform a game in which the operation is performed in the first operation mode according to each special result. As a result, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature M3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop When the operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result (9th minor combination ~ 32nd small combination) has been set as a result (push order bell) that can be established,
The mode notification means is capable of executing the mode notification for an operation mode including either the first operation mode or the second operation mode when a lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result,
The feature M2 is characterized in that the notification mode of the first specific notification by the first specific notification means and the notification mode of the mode notification by the mode notification means are different so that the player can identify them. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, and when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first result winning is possible. There is a so-called pushing order role that allows the establishment of a second result award with fewer benefits than the above, and since the mode notification as the pushing order notification of the pushing order role is performed, it is advantageous depending on the presence or absence of the mode report. It is possible to realize excellent playability, such as being able to greatly vary the degree of play. In such a game, when a first specific notification for notifying a first operation mode of a special result is added to the gameplay, the first result winning of the advantageous side can be established when the operation is performed according to the mode notification. Assuming that, similarly, from the relationship between the mode notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop operation means and the first specific notification, the second privilege on the advantageous side can be obtained even when the operation is performed according to the first specific notification. Then, the player may misunderstand. In that regard, as in the above configuration, since the notification modes of the mode notification and the first specific notification are made different so that the player can identify them, when the operation is performed according to the first specific notification, the disadvantageous side Even when the first privilege is obtained, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. By operating in the first operation mode as described above, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player is allowed to perform the first specific process on the advantageous side without any sense of discomfort.

Feature M4. the first manipulation mode for the first special result includes a plurality of manipulation modes;
the first manipulation mode for the second special result includes a plurality of manipulation modes;
The first specific notification means includes means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to one operation mode among the plurality of operation modes as the first operation mode for the first special result; means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode among the plurality of operation modes as the first operation mode for the result; and means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to one operation mode among the plurality of operation modes as the first operation mode; and means for executing the plurality of operation modes as the first operation mode for the second special result. A gaming machine according to feature M2 or feature M3, further comprising means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the first operation mode for the first special result and the first operation mode for the second special result are each set to include a plurality of operation modes. As the first specific notification that sometimes notifies the first operation mode, each operation mode is set to be executed. Therefore, even if the first operation mode includes a plurality of operation modes, It is possible to avoid an event in which the reported operation mode is biased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the reliability of the first specific notification as compared with a configuration in which the same operation mode is always notified.

Feature M5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, the second specific notification corresponding to the second operation mode for the first special result (pressing order notification effect when winning a special role in AT mode) is executed by a predetermined notification means, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, a second specific notification (in AT mode) corresponding to the second operation mode for the second special result 2nd specific notification means for executing the pressing order notification effect at the time of winning a special role by a predetermined notification means (in the lottery result correspondence processing by the main control device 101, the special role A is set in a situation where the AT mode flag is set) ~C function of executing processing for output setting of push order notification command at the time of winning, function of executing processing for performing push order notification effect by display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, even though the game is premised on a game in which a plurality of special results are provided and the operation is performed not only in the first operation mode but also in the second operation mode, when the first special result is won, the game is changed to the second operation mode. It is also possible to play a game in which the player is operated in the second special result, and the player is operated in the second operation mode when the second special result is won. By doing so, it is possible to realize a plurality of game features with one gaming machine, and since the player is free to decide whether or not to follow the notification by the second specific notification means, when the special result is won, the first It is also possible for the player to select whether to play a game in which the operation is performed not only in the operation mode but also in the second operation mode, or whether to perform a game in which the operation is performed in the second operation mode according to each special result. As a result, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature M6. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop When the operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result (9th minor combination ~ 32nd small role) has been set as a result (push order bell) that can be established,
The mode notification means is capable of executing the mode notification for an operation mode including either the first operation mode or the second operation mode when a lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result,
Feature M5 characterized in that the notification mode of the second specific notification by the second specific notification means and the notification mode of the mode notification by the mode notification means are set so as to be difficult for the player to distinguish. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, and when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first result winning is possible. There is a so-called pushing order role that allows the establishment of a second result award with fewer benefits than the above, and since the mode notification as the pushing order notification of the pushing order role is performed, it is advantageous depending on the presence or absence of the mode report. It is possible to realize excellent playability, such as being able to greatly vary the degree of play. In such a game, when a second specific notification for notifying a second operation mode of a special result is added to the game aspect, the winning of the first result on the advantageous side can be established when the operation is performed according to the mode notification. On the premise of , the second benefit on the advantageous side can be obtained even when the operation is performed in accordance with the second specific notification. Since the notification modes of the mode notification and the second specific notification are set so as to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between them, it is advantageous for the player to follow the notification without being particularly conscious of which notification it is. It becomes possible to perform operations on the other side.

Feature M7. the second manipulation mode for the first special result includes a plurality of manipulation modes;
the second operation mode for the second special result includes a plurality of operation modes;
The second specific notification means executes a second specific notification corresponding to one of the plurality of operation modes as the second operation mode for the first special result; means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode among the plurality of operation modes as the second operation mode for the result; and means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to one operation mode among the plurality of operation modes as the second operation mode; and means for executing the plurality of operation modes as the second operation mode for the second special result. A gaming machine according to feature M5 or feature M6, further comprising means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the second operation mode for the first special result and the second operation mode for the second special result are each set to include a plurality of operation modes. As the second specific notification that sometimes notifies the second operation mode, each operation mode is set to be executed. Therefore, even if the second operation mode includes a plurality of operation modes, It is possible to avoid an event in which the reported operation mode is biased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the reliability of the second specific notification as compared with a configuration in which the same operation mode is always notified.

Feature M8. The first specific process and the lottery means executed by the specific process means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. The first specific process executed by the specific processing means when the lottery result is the second special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the lottery by the lottery means The result is the first special result, and the second specific process executed by the specific processing means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode and the lottery result by the lottery means are the At least one of the second special result and the second specific processing executed by the specific processing means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode is a different process. (FIGS. 93 and 94).

According to the above configuration, the contents of the specific processing to be executed depending on the operation mode are set differently between the first special result and the second special result. Depending on the special result that is won even if the game is operated in a mode, the benefits of the specific processing relating to the mode notification function by the mode notification means differ. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which special result the first operation mode (second operation mode) of the operation mode to be executed is, while increasing attention to which special result it is. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game suitably.

Feature M9. The lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, and the first privilege given by the privilege giving means when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode and the lottery means The lottery result is the second special result, and the first privilege given by the privilege granting means when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the lottery result by the lottery means. The first special result, wherein the second privilege given by the privilege giving means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode and the lottery result by the lottery means are the second special result. As a result, at least one of the second privilege given by the privilege giving means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode is set to be a different privilege. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M8, wherein

According to the above configuration, the first special result and the second special result are set so that different benefits are provided depending on the operation modes. Even if the game is operated in this mode, the benefits obtained will differ depending on the special results that are won. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which special result the first operation mode (second operation mode) of the operation mode to be executed is, while increasing attention to which special result it is. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game suitably.

Feature M10. Means for making it difficult for the player to identify whether the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result or the second special result (when special roles A to C are won during the AT mode by the main controller 101 A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M9, characterized in that it has a function of notifying an operation sequence but not notifying a special combination.

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the first special result and the second special result. It becomes impossible to distinguish whether it is the second operation mode when the second special result is won. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as playing a game while predicting which result one's own operation corresponds to.

In particular, in configurations such as the feature M8 and the feature M9, in which specific processing and benefits are different depending on the special result, the player's profit can greatly differ depending on which result the operation corresponds to. It is possible to improve the fun of predicting to which one the operation of one's own corresponds.

Feature M11. Means for allowing the player to identify whether the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result or the second special result (when special roles A to C are won before shifting to the AT mode by the main controller 101 is a function of notifying a special combination), the gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M10.

According to the above configuration, the player can distinguish between the first special result and the second special result, and whether the operation mode being operated is the first operation mode when the first special result is won, It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is the second operation mode when the second special result is won. By doing so, the player can play the game while grasping which result the player's own operation corresponds to, and it is possible to make the player perform the operation more carefully.

In particular, in configurations such as the feature M8 and the feature M9, in which specific processing and benefits are different depending on the special result, the player's profit can greatly differ depending on which result the operation corresponds to. It is becoming more important to grasp which one the user's own operation corresponds to, and the significance of applying the above configuration is high.

Feature M12. A third special result (special combination C) different from the first special result and the second special result is set as the special result,
The first operation mode (operation mode in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first) for the first special result is set to be the second operation mode for the second special result and the third special result. and the first operation mode (the operation mode in which the middle stop switch 43 is operated first) for the second special result is the second operation mode for the first special result and the third special result. and the first operation mode (the operation mode in which the right stop switch 44 is operated first) for the third special result is the second operation mode for the first special result and the second special result. is set to be
The stop operation means comprises a first stop operation means, a second stop operation means, and a third stop operation means,
The first operation mode for the first special result is to operate the first stop operation means for a specific number, and the first operation mode for the second special result is to operate the second stop operation means. Any one of features M1 to M11, wherein the operation is a specific number of operations, and the first operation mode for the third special result is operating the third stop operation means for the specific number of operations. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, as many special results as the number of stop operation means are provided, and which stop operation means is operated at a specific number is set as the first operation mode for each special result. By doing so, it is possible to predict which special result is won, and furthermore, in terms of game characteristics such as which operation mode to operate, only which stop operation means should be operated for a specific number. , the difficulty level of the novel game can be lowered, and many players can enjoy the game.

The inventions described in the features M1 to M12 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features J1 to J8, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to Features N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A mode result (push order bell, special combination) is set in which the second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is granted by the granting means,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
Specific notification means for executing specific notification corresponding to the specific processing by the specific processing means (function for executing CZ effect setting processing at start and CZ effect setting processing at stop by display control device 81);
with
The specific notification means is
First specific notification means (for performing double eye effect or loose eye effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the specific process executed based on the first opportunity (third stop operation) function to perform processing) and
Second specific notification means (at the time of cherry winning by the display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the specific process executed based on a second trigger (operation of the start lever 41) different from the first trigger A function that executes processing for performing a fixed effect),
with
A game machine, wherein notification control of the specific notification by the first specific notification means and notification control of the specific notification by the second specific notification means are different.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided, while the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. A special result is set in which the second privilege is granted when the operation is performed, and the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, so when the special result occurs, the stop operation It is possible to change the degree of advantage depending on whether or not the mode notification of the operation mode of the means is executed, which contributes to increasing the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, in the game feature in which the privilege provided depending on the operation mode is different, the specific processing regarding the mode notification of the operation mode is executed based on the first trigger and the second trigger. Since the notification control of the specific notification corresponding to the specific process is different depending on whether it is executed based on the specific notification, when the player predicts the result of the specific process from the specific notification, which trigger is based on It is possible to attract attention including whether it is a specific process, and to apply it to game characteristics such as the result or content of the specific process being different depending on the trigger, etc. It is possible to help.

Feature N2. The specific processing means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (special role), as the first opportunity, the first specific processing means for executing the specific process after the operation of the stop operation means (for example, by the main controller 101 A function to execute AT lottery processing at the start);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific combination) different from the first result, as the second opportunity, second specific processing means for executing the specific process before the stop operation means is operated. (For example, a function of executing AT lottery processing at the time of stop by the main controller 101);
with
The first specific notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific notification at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means in the first game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result,
The second specific notification means executes the second specific notification as the specific notification before the specific timing (at the time of the first stop ON operation) in the second game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result. The gaming machine according to feature N1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in a game feature in which a privilege to be provided may differ depending on the operation mode, the specific process related to the mode notification of the operation mode is performed by the operation of the stop operation means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. If it is the second result, it is executed after the operation of the stop operation means, and if it is the first result, it is executed at a specific timing after the operation. When the specific notification is executed and the result is the second result, the second specific notification corresponding to the specific process is executed before the specific timing, so that the lottery result and the execution timing of the specific process are associated and the lottery is performed. To realize an interesting game property in which the hand to operate a stop operation means is forcefully applied so that the result of the specific processing is advantageous to the player after predicting and grasping the execution timing of the specific processing from the result. can be done.

Feature N3. the first result is the aspect result;
The specific processing means executes a first specific process as the specific process when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is executed. is set not to
In the first game, after the branch timing (first stop ON operation) when the operation of each of the stop operation means is performed to determine whether the operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode characterized by having means (a function of executing a process for performing a ten-pie effect by the display control device 81) for making notification corresponding to the specific process performed before the specific timing. The gaming machine according to feature N2.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result is the first result, the first privilege is granted when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the first specific process is performed as the specific process related to the mode notification function. While being executed, if the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given, and the second specific process is executed as the specific process related to the mode notification function, resulting in the first result. In this case, the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the mode notification function (first operation mode). It is possible to realize

In addition, in the first game in which the first specific notification is executed at a specific timing after the operation, the specific process is performed after the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode and before the specific timing. Since the notification corresponding to the specific process can be executed as early as possible, it is possible to understand whether the first operation mode or the second operation mode should be performed by the notification. You can prevent it from being stolen. That is, for example, if the result of the specific processing can be detected in advance, and if the detected result is not favorable to the player, the second specific processing is performed, but the second operation is performed so as to acquire the second privilege. Although it is conceivable that the player may operate in the mode, by causing the notification corresponding to the specific process to occur after the timing at which the first operation mode and the second operation mode diverge, as described above, it becomes difficult for the above action to be performed. . Therefore, it is possible to start the notification corresponding to the specific process in the first game from an early stage while ensuring the fairness of the game.

Feature N4. the first result is the aspect result;
The specific processing means executes a first specific process as the specific process when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is executed. is set not to
In the second game, a branch timing when the operation of each of the stop operation means is performed to determine which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is performed in the first game. (at the time of the first stop ON operation), means capable of executing notification corresponding to the specific processing (function of executing processing for performing a confirmation effect when a cherry is won by the display control device 81) is provided. The gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, by generating the notification corresponding to the specific process based on the second result at the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, it is possible to grasp the result from the notification. However, as long as the first result can also be predicted, the selection of the operation between the first operation mode and the second operation mode is correct and the result of the specific process is preferable for the player when the notification is made. It is possible to realize a novel game property such that whether or not the game has occurred is grasped by notification at the branch timing, and it is also possible to greatly enhance the performance toward the notification at the specific timing.

Feature N5. the first result is the aspect result;
The specific processing means executes a first specific process as the specific process when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is executed. is set not to
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a specific looping body (left reel 32L) among the looping bodies is specified at a specific position. The design is stopped, and the first design combination is stopped at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (Cherry A to C), the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific rotating body, and the first pattern combination and the first pattern combination are placed at the effective position. By stopping a third pattern combination different from the second pattern combination, a privilege corresponding to the second result is granted by the privilege granting means,
Special notification means capable of executing special notification in a situation where the specific pattern stops at a specific position of the specific rotating body and the other rotating body does not stop The gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N4, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing for

When the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific loop, it is determined from the stop result whether it is based on the second result or the first operation mode at the time of winning the first result. can't In such a configuration, when the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific loop, the special notification may be performed, so that the special notification corresponds to the specific processing based on the second result. It is not possible to determine whether it corresponds to the first specific process or the second specific process after that, and there are more choices in predicting the result when the special notification is performed. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of the special notification.

Feature N6. The gaming machine according to feature N5, wherein the special notification means executes notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing based on the second result as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, the specific processing is performed before the stop operation, and the notification corresponding to the result is executed as the special notification when the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific rotating body. By doing so, if the scene in which the special notification is performed is the first result, the situation is still the same as the stop result before the execution of the specific process, but the content of the special notification does not have a contradiction. It becomes possible to improve the reliability of the special notification.

Feature N7. It is characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the second pattern combination stops at the effective position without the specific pattern stopping at the specific position of the specific circular body. The gaming machine according to N5 or feature N6.

According to the above configuration, when the first result is won, the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific orbiting body when operated in the first operation mode, but when the second operation mode is operated, the specific pattern stops. Since it does not stop, it is possible to strongly give the impression that the special notification was executed as a result of the selection of the operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the special notification.

Feature N8. The specific processing means is
a means capable of executing, as the specific process, a process for causing a specific event (AT mode transition win, CZ mode shift, AT add-on win, ceiling counter subtraction) to facilitate execution of mode notification by the mode notification means; ,
The specific process in the case of the first result is set so that the specific event is more likely to occur than the specific process in the case of the predetermined second result (for example, Cherry A). The gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N7 characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the specific process is performed after the operation based on the first result, the specific event is more likely to occur than when the specific process is performed before the operation based on the second result. Therefore, in the case of the game in which the second result is won, it is overwhelmingly easier to execute the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process in the game, but the specific process leading to the specific event desired by the player is the first. As a result, the winning game is more likely to be executed. Therefore, by executing notification corresponding to the result of the specific process at a special timing in the game in which the specific process is performed even if the result is the first result, even the game that is the second result can be specified. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the notification corresponding to the result of processing.

Feature N9. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second result (normal replies A to C, chance A to C, cherry A to C, watermelon) is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the first result. The gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N8, wherein the gaming machine is set to .

According to the above configuration, the appearance rate of the first result is lower than that of the second result. In the case of the result, inconvenience such as not being notified of the specific processing after it is executed is likely to occur. In this regard, by executing notification corresponding to the result of the specific process at a special timing in the game regardless of the result, the fact that the result is the first result can be confused with the second result. It is possible to prevent the content of the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process from being seen through due to the timing, and to favorably increase the degree of attention to the notification.

Feature N10. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
with
The specific processing means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (special combination), the first specific processing means for executing the specific process after the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the start AT lottery process by the main controller 101 function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific combination) different from the first result, second specific processing means (for example, main control device) for executing the specific process before operating the stop operation means 101 function to execute AT lottery processing at stop time);
with
A first specific notification means capable of executing a first specific notification corresponding to the specific process at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means in the first game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. (a function of executing a process for performing a double eye effect or a loose eye effect by the display control device 81);
A second game capable of executing a second specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process before the specific timing (at the time of the first stop ON operation) in the second game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result. A game machine characterized by comprising a specific notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a confirmation effect when a cherry prize is won by a display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided, while the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. A special result is set in which the second privilege is granted when the operation is performed, and the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, so when the special result occurs, the stop operation It is possible to change the degree of advantage depending on whether or not the mode notification of the operation mode of the means is executed, which contributes to increasing the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, in the game feature in which the privilege provided by the operation mode may differ, the specific processing related to the mode notification of the operation mode is stopped when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. Since the process is executed after the operating means is operated, and in the case of the second result, it is executed after the stop operation means is operated, the result of the lottery is associated with the execution timing of the specific process, and the result of the lottery is determined. After grasping the game to be predicted and the execution timing of the specific processing based on the prediction, it is interesting that the hand that operates the stop operation means is forced so that the result of the specific processing is advantageous to the player. Playability can be realized.

Then, in the case of the first result, a second specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is executed at a specific timing after the operation, and in the case of the second result, the specific process is performed before the specific timing. Since the third specific notification corresponding to the result of is executed, it is possible to predict which result is the second specific notification or the third specific notification, and the degree of attention to each specific notification is preferably increased. At the same time, it is possible to suitably realize the game property of operating the stop operation means after predicting the result.

Each configuration defined by the features N1 to N9 may be applied individually to the feature N10, or may be applied in combination.

Feature N11. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
with
The specific processing means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (special combination), the first specific processing means for executing the specific process after the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the start AT lottery process by the main controller 101 function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific combination) different from the first result, second specific processing means (for example, main control device) for executing the specific process before operating the stop operation means 101 function to execute AT lottery processing at stop time);
with
A first specific notification corresponding to the specific process can be executed at a special timing (second stop ON operation) in a first game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, and the lottery means The first specific notification means (display control A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing a process for generating a tenpai effect by a device 81).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided, while the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. A special result is set in which the second privilege is granted when the operation is performed, and the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, so when the special result occurs, the stop operation It is possible to change the degree of advantage depending on whether or not the mode notification of the operation mode of the means is executed, which contributes to increasing the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, in the game feature in which the privilege provided by the operation mode may differ, the specific processing related to the mode notification of the operation mode is stopped when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. Since the process is executed after the operating means is operated, and in the case of the second result, it is executed after the stop operation means is operated, the result of the lottery is associated with the execution timing of the specific process, and the result of the lottery is determined. After grasping the game to be predicted and the execution timing of the specific processing based on the prediction, it is interesting that the hand that operates the stop operation means is forced so that the result of the specific processing is advantageous to the player. Playability can be realized.

In addition, in the case of the first result in which the specific process is executed after the operation and in the case of the second result in which the specific process is executed before the operation, the result of the specific process is performed at a special timing in any game result. Since the first specific notification corresponding to .

Each configuration defined by the features N1 to N10 may be applied individually to the feature N11, or may be applied in combination.

The inventions described in the features N1 to N11 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features N1 to N10, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1 to F8 , Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to Features I12, Features J1 to Features J8, Features K1 to Features K9, Features L1 to Features L7, Features M1 to Features M12, Features N1 to N11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in Configuration 1 individually, or to apply a combination of some or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature N group to each configuration of feature group A to feature group N detailed above, It is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
a stop operation means for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. drive control means for executing
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
a granting means capable of granting a number of game values corresponding to the lottery results of the lottery means;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at a predetermined position that can be visually recognized through the display unit, and the first number of games is played by the giving means. While value is assigned,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination is placed at a predetermined position visible through the display unit. can be stopped, and a specific result is set in which a second number of game values, which is larger than the first number, is awarded by the granting means,
Mode notification means capable of executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means;
a specific processing means capable of executing a specific process related to the mode notification function of the mode notification means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images